TL1 Reference Guide - 323-1059-190.1.r16

NTN465GNNTN465GN
Nortel
323-1059-190
Optical Metro 3500

TL1 ReferencePart 1 of 4
Standard Release 16.0 Issue 1 December 2008
Whats inside...
Introducing TL1 Commands A to ED-zz
See Part 2 for commands ENT-aa to RST-zz See Part 3 for commands RTRV-aa to RTRV-RINGMAP See Part 4 for commands RTRV-ROLL-aa to Z
Copyright 2000-2008 Nortel Networks, All Rights Reserved

This document is protected by copyright laws and international treaties. All information, copyrights and any other intellectual property rights contained in this document are the property of Nortel Networks. Except as expressly authorized in writing by Nortel Networks, the holder is granted no rights to use the information contained herein and this document shall not be published, copied, produced or reproduced, modified, translated, compiled, distributed, displayed or transmitted, in whole or part, in any form or media.
This information is provided as is, and Nortel Networks does not make or provide any warranty of any kind, expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of merchantability, non-infringement of third party intellectual property rights, and fitness for a particular purpose. Nortel, the Nortel logo, and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
Printed in Canada
iii
Contents
About this document Introducing TL1
TL1 command interface 1-3 TL1 prompt 1-3 User authentication 1-3 User identifier 1-3 Password identifier 1-3 Security access level 1-4 Target identifier and source identifier 1-5 Multiple sessions 1-5 TL1 message notation 1-6 Access identifier 1-6 Correlation tag 1-6 Command structure 1-6 Parameter value grouping 1-7 Mandatory punctuation 1-7 TL1 command acknowledgment 1-7 TL1 message overview 1-7 TL1 message types 1-7 TL1 command response header 1-8 Editing features 1-10 TL1 script file 1-10 Online syntax help 1-11
ix 1-1
Commands A to ED-zz
ACT-USER 2-8 ADD-SOC 2-10 ALW-EX-OC12 2-11 ALW-EX-OC192 2-13 ALW-EX-OC3 2-14 ALW-EX-OC48 2-16 ALW-MSG-ALL 2-17 ALW-MSG-BROADCAST 2-18 ALW-SECU-CID 2-19 ALW-SECU-USER 2-20 ALW-UPGRD 2-21 AUD-BLSR 2-22
2-1
TL1 ReferencePart 1 of 4 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
iv Contents CANC-INSTALL 2-24 CANC-PROV 2-25 CANC-PROV-SOC 2-26 CANC-PROV-SP 2-27 CANC-RINGMAP 2-28 CANC-TL1SCRPT-NE 2-29 CANC-UPGRD 2-30 CANC-USER 2-32 CHG-ACCMD-STS1 2-33 CHG-ACCMD-STS12C 2-36 CHG-ACCMD-STS24C 2-38 CHG-ACCMD-STS3C 2-40 CHG-ACCMD-STS48c 2-42 CHG-ACCMD-T1 2-44 CHG-ACCMD-T3 2-46 CHG-ACCMD-VT1 2-48 CHK-INSTALL 2-50 CHK-PROV 2-51 CHK-PROV-SOC 2-53 CHK-PROV-SP 2-56 CHK-RINGMAP 2-59 CHK-UPGRD 2-60 CLR-ALM-SECU 2-62 CLR-LAN-STATS 2-63 CMMT-INSTALL 2-64 CMMT-PROV 2-65 CMMT-PROV-SP 2-66 CMMT-RINGMAP 2-67 CMMT-ROLL-STS1 2-68 CMMT-ROLL-STS12C 2-73 CMMT-ROLL-STS24C 2-76 CMMT-ROLL-STS3C 2-79 CMMT-ROLL-STS48C 2-81 CMMT-ROLL-VT1 2-83 CMMT-TL1SCRPT-NE 2-86 CMMT-UPGRD 2-87 CONN-TACC-STS1 2-88 CONN-TACC-STS12C 2-92 CONN-TACC-STS24C 2-94 CONN-TACC-STS3C 2-96 CONN-TACC-STS48C 2-98 CONN-TACC-T1 2-100 CONN-TACC-T3 2-102 CONN-TACC-VT1 2-105 CONN-TSTSIG-T1 2-108 CONN-TSTSIG-T3 2-111 DEFRAG-EQPT 2-114 DISC-TACC 2-116 DISC-TSTSIG-T1 2-118 DISC-TSTSIG-T3 2-119 DLT-ALM-PROFILE 2-120 Optical Metro 3500 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
Contents v DLT-BANNER 2-122 DLT-BLSRRING 2-123 DLT-CRS-STS1 2-124 DLT-CRS-STS12C 2-128 DLT-CRS-STS24C 2-131 DLT-CRS-STS3C 2-133 DLT-CRS-STS48C 2-136 DLT-CRS-VT1 2-138 DLT-EC1 2-142 DLT-EQPT 2-143 DLT-ETH 2-147 DLT-FAC 2-149 DLT-FC 2-150 DLT-FFP-OC12 2-151 DLT-FFP-OC192 2-152 DLT-FFP-OC3 2-154 DLT-FFP-OC48 2-155 DLT-GRE 2-157 DLT-IPT 2-158 DLT-IPTR 2-159 DLT-LLSDCC 2-160 DLT-OC12 2-161 DLT-OC192 2-162 DLT-OC3 2-163 DLT-OC48 2-164 DLT-PROV 2-165 DLT-PVC 2-167 DLT-RINGMAP 2-168 DLT-ROLL-STS1 2-169 DLT-ROLL-STS12C 2-174 DLT-ROLL-STS24C 2-177 DLT-ROLL-STS3C 2-180 DLT-ROLL-STS48C 2-183 DLT-ROLL-VT1 2-185 DLT-SECU-ACCESS 2-189 DLT-SECU-BADPID 2-190 DLT-SECU-USER 2-191 DLT-T1 2-192 DLT-T3 2-193 DLT-UPGRD 2-194 ED-ALM-PROFILE 2-195 ED-BLSRRING 2-197 ED-COMM 2-198 ED-CRS-STS1 2-199 ED-CRS-STS12C 2-205 ED-CRS-STS24C 2-209 ED-CRS-STS3C 2-212 ED-CRS-STS48C 2-216 ED-CRS-VT1 2-219 ED-DAT 2-224 ED-DFLT-AINS 2-225 TL1 ReferencePart 1 of 4 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
vi Contents ED-EC1 2-226 ED-ETH 2-227 ED-FC 2-232 ED-FFP-OC12 2-234 ED-FFP-OC192 2-236 ED-FFP-OC3 2-238 ED-FFP-OC48 2-240 ED-IP 2-242 ED-LLSDCC 2-243 ED-LLX25 2-246 ED-NETYPE 2-247 ED-OC12 2-248 ED-OC192 2-251 ED-OC3 2-254 ED-OC48 2-258 ED-PMCONFIG-EC1 2-261 ED-PMCONFIG-ETH 2-263 ED-PMCONFIG-FC 2-265 ED-PMCONFIG-OC12 2-267 ED-PMCONFIG-OC192 2-269 ED-PMCONFIG-OC3 2-271 ED-PMCONFIG-OC48 2-273 ED-PMCONFIG-STS1 2-275 ED-PMCONFIG-STS12C 2-278 ED-PMCONFIG-STS24C 2-281 ED-PMCONFIG-STS3C 2-283 ED-PMCONFIG-STS48C 2-286 ED-PMCONFIG-WAN 2-288 ED-PTX25 2-291 ED-ROLL-STS1 2-293 ED-ROLL-STS12C 2-297 ED-ROLL-STS24C 2-300 ED-ROLL-STS3C 2-303 ED-ROLL-STS48C 2-307 ED-ROLL-VT1 2-310 ED-SECU-PID 2-314 ED-SECU-USER 2-316 ED-SITE-DSM 2-319 ED-STS1 2-320 ED-STS12C 2-323 ED-STS24C 2-325 ED-STS3C 2-327 ED-SYS 2-329 ED-T1 2-331 ED-T3 2-336 ED-TARP-CONFIG 2-338 ED-TARP-TBL 2-341 ED-TOD-MODE 2-343 ED-ULSDCC (network element) 2-345 ED-ULSDCC (network processor) 2-347 ED-ULX25 2-349 Optical Metro 3500 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
Contents vii ED-VC 2-352 ED-WAN 2-354
viii Contents
Optical Metro 3500
323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
323-1059-190 ix
About this document

You are reading Part 1 of the TL1 Reference for Nortel Optical Metro 3500 Release 16.0. Part 1 covers the TL1 commands from A to ED-zz. Part 1 also provides an introduction to the TL1 interface. Part 2 covers the TL1 commands from ENT-aa to RST-zz. Part 3 covers the TL1 commands from RTRV-aa to RTRV-RINGMAP. Part 4 covers the TL1 commands from RTRV-ROLL-aa to Z. Part 4 also covers error codes and messages. ATTENTION Each part of the TL1 Reference has its own table of contents, which contains topics found in that part only. Part 2 continues sequential chapter numbering from Part 1. Part 3 continues sequential chapter numbering from Part 2. Part 4 continues sequential chapter numbering from Part 3.
Supported software
This document supports the software release for Nortel Optical Metro 3500 Release 16.0
Supported hardware
This document supports the Optical Metro 3500 shelf.
x About this document
Hardware naming conventions

The following naming conventions are used throughout this document to identify the Optical Metro hardware: the extended shelf processor (SPx) is referred to as the shelf processor the extended network processor (NPx) is referred to as the network processor starting with Release 13.0, optical interface circuit packs include both SONET and SDH terminology on their faceplates labels (OC-n/STM-n). However, only SONET terminology is used in references to optical interface circuit packs in this NTP. For example, this document refers to OC-12x4 STS circuit packs, but the faceplate label for this circuit pack is OC-12x4/STM-4x4 STS
Audience
The following members of your company are the intended audience of this Nortel technical publication (NTP): planners provisioners network administrators transmission standards engineers
Standards
The Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) and the Electronics Industries Alliance (EIA) accepted RS-232 as a standard in 1997 and renumbered this standard as TIA/EIA-232. In this document, RS-232 is used to reflect current labels on the hardware and in the software for the Optical Metro 3500.
Optical Metro 3500
About this document xi
Optical Metro 3500 NTP library

EX1879p
Guides and Shelf Setup
TL1 Reference
Operations, Administration and Provisioning
Maintenance
Supporting documentation for the Optical Metro 3500 Library Change Application Procedures (CAPs) Data Communications Network Planning Guide (NTR710AM)
About the Optical Metro 3500 NTP Library (323-1059-090) Planning and Ordering Guide (NTRN10AU) Network Interworking Guide (NTCA68CA) Installation (323-1059-201) Commissioning (323-1059-210) System Testing (323-1059-222)
TL1 Reference (323-1059-190)
System Reconfiguration (323-1059-224) Security and Administration (323-1059-302) Provisioning Synchronization (323-1059-310) Protection Switching (323-1059-311) Bandwidth Management (323-1059-320) Provisioning Equipment and Facilities (323-1059-350)
Performance Monitoring (323-1059-510) Network Surveillance (323-1059-520) Alarm and Trouble Clearing (323-1059-543)
Optical Metro 3000 series DWDM Application Guide (NTRN12AA) Optical Packet Edge System Planning Guide (NTRN10YS) Optical Packet Edge System Network Applications and Management (NTRN11YS) Optical Packet Edge System User Guide (NTN465YS) Site Manager Planning and Installation Guide, Rel 10.0 (NTNM35KA)
xii About this document
Technical support and information

For technical support and information from Nortel, refer to the following table.
Technical Assistance Service For service-affecting problems: For 24-hour emergency recovery or software upgrade support, that is, for: North America: 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835)
restoration of service for equipment that has been carrying International: traffic and is out of service 001-919-992-8300 issues that prevent traffic protection switching issues that prevent completion of software upgrades For non-service-affecting problems: North America: For 24-hour support on issues requiring immediate support 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835) or for 14-hour support (8 a.m. to 10 p.m. EST) on upgrade Note: You require an express routing notification and non-urgent issues. code (ERC). To determine the ERC, see our corporate Web site at www.nortel.com. Click on the Express Routing Codes link. International: Varies according to country. For a list of telephone numbers, see our corporate Web site at www.nortel.com. Click on the Contact Us link. Global software upgrade support: North America: 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835) International: Varies according to country. For a list of telephone numbers, see our corporate Web site at www.nortel.com. Click on the Contact Us link.
Optical Metro 3500
323-1059-190 1-1
Introducing TL1
This chapter provides an introduction to the Transaction Language 1 (TL1) used on the network element and the network processor. TL1 is a common language protocol for messages exchanged between network elements and network processors in an Optical Metro 3500 Multiservice Platform series network. TL1 is the primary user interface to the network element and network processor, and is used to operate, administer, maintain, and provision the network. The TL1 implementation on the network element and network processor allows the user to perform the following functions: commissioning testing provisioning alarm and network surveillance performance monitoring protection switching network security and administration inventory retrieval
Standards compliance
1-
The TL1 interface complies with the Bellcore standard TR-TSY-439, Operations Technology Generic Requirements (OTGR): Section 12.3, TR-TSY-833, Issue 3: Network Maintenance - Network Element and Transport Surveillance Messages Section 12.2, TR-NWT-199, Issue 2: Operations Application Messages and Memory Administration Messages, Specifications of Memory Administration at the OS/NE Interface Section 12.5, TR-NWT-835, Issue 2: Operations Application Messages Network Element (NE) Security Parameter Administration Messages
1-2 Introducing TL1
TL1 user interface on the network element

The TL1 interface is a text-based, single command line user interface. On the shelf, the TL1 user interface is obtained by connecting a VT100 or other ANSI, standard terminal to a DB-9, RS-232, DTE, craft access port, or to the DB-25, RS-232, DCE, craft access port on the shelf processor circuit pack. All network elements in the system can be accessed from any other network element in the system.
TL1 user interface on the network processor

The TL1 interface on the network processor allows the retrieval of all TL1 alarms and events from the network elements in the network processor span of control. The TL1 interface also allows provisioning of network processor facilities, X.25 parameters, an IP address and up to three manual area addresses. The network processor requires one of the following connections: backplane connection from the co-located shelf processor to the network processor through OSI/Ethernet (10base T). You can access the network processor using a VT100 compatible terminal connected to any network element in the system. You do not have to log in to the local network element to log in to the network processor Site Manager to network processor through TCP/IP over Ethernet (10base T) Optical Network Manager Applications Platform or Optical Network Manager Multiservice Managed Object Agent to network processor through TCP/IP over Ethernet (10base T) an operations support system (OSS) to network processor through the X.25 port a straight Ethernet connection through the central office LAN (COLAN)
Optical Metro 3500
Introducing TL1 1-3
TL1 command interface

TL1 prompt The TL1 prompt is indicated by a less than sign (<) on the left side of the screen. The prompt appears in response to the semi-colon (;) from the terminal keyboard. TL1 commands are executed from the TL1 prompt. Note: TL1 uses a semi-colon (;), not a carriage return, as a line terminator. The semi-colon is shown at the end of all TL1 commands in this guide. User authentication You can log in to a network processor or network element using remote authentication, challenge-response authentication, or local authentication. The methods available depend on the state of centralized security administration (CSA) and on the provisioned alternate method, as follows: If CSA is enabled, you can log in using remote authentication or challenge-response authentication. If CSA is disabled or is enabled but unavailable, you can log in using local authentication or challenge-response authentication if local authentication is provisioned as the alternate method. If challenge-response is provisioned as the alternate method, only challenge-response is available (local accounts are disabled). By default, challenge-response authentication is the alternate method when CSA is enabled and local authentication is the alternate method when CSA is disabled.
To log in using remote or local authentication, you must have a valid user identifier (UID) and password identifier (PID). To log in using challenge-response authentication, enter the UID to partially log in to the network processor or network element. Then, use the RTRV-CHALLENGE and ENTER-CHALLENGE-RESPONSE commands to complete the login. See RTRV-CHALLENGE on page 4-69 and ENT-CHALLENGE-RESPONSE on page 3-12. For more information on authentication modes, refer to the Planning and Ordering Guide (NTRN10AU) and to the TL1 commands used to set CSA attributes, UIDs, and PIDs. User identifier The UID is a unique non-confidential name to identify each authorized system user. UIDs are between 1 and 10 alphanumeric characters. It is essential to have a UID to activate a user login session. Password identifier The PID is a confidential code to qualify the authorized system user to access the account specified by a UID. It is essential to use the PID for local or remote authentication or to change the current PID.
1-4 Introducing TL1
PIDs must meet the following: The PID must be between 8 and 10 characters. The PID can include alphabetical characters, numbers, and the following symbols: !#$%`()*+-./<=>@[]^_'{|}~ The PID must contain at least one alphanumeric character and one non-alphanumeric character (such as one of the above symbols or a number). The PID cannot contain any of the following characters: semicolon (;), colon (:), ampersand (&), comma (,), spaces (deleted as entered), control characters, and question mark (?). The PID cannot contain the associated user identifier (UID). You cannot use any of your previous five passwords or any words that are in the list of unusable passwords. The list of unusable passwords is set with the ENT-SECU-BADPID command and can be retrieved with the RTRV-SECU-BADPID command. A double quote () entered in the PID must be preceded by a backslash (\). The backslash is considered as a character in the length of the password. Carriage returns (<Enter>) are ignored.
Security access level When logging in to a network element or a network processor, an account name and password are used. Each account is created by the user of a master account. During account creation a security access level is assigned from 1 through 5 on the network element or the network processor. This number is called the user privilege code (UPC). The UPC security levels offer access to a range of task execution capabilities as follows: Surveillance - level 5, allows surveillance of all network elements in the network processor span of control. A user account with a level 5 UPC is valid only under the following circumstances: a login to the network processor from Optical Network Manager Applications Platform or Optical Network Manager Multiservice Managed Object Agent a login to the network processor if the network processor is the gateway to the network Note 1: A user account with a level 5 UPC can only be used to log into a network processor using a local connection. Note 2: Starting with Release 12, up to three Level 5 users can log into and have access to the same network processor at the same time if the UIDs are different. Each of these Level 5 users can access and manage all 16 network elements within the span of control of this network processor.
Optical Metro 3500 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
Introducing TL1 1-5
Note 3: Autonomous messages will not be displayed to the level 5 user, who logs in from the TL1 interface, until you issue the ALW-MSG-ALL command. Administration - level 4, allows complete access to all commands and processes, except for automatic surveillance of all network elements in the network processor span of control; level 4 can be assigned to more than one account so that several users have full privilege access to a network element Provisioning - level 3, allows access to provisioning, testing, editing, and retrieving commands Control - level 2, permits access to operate, release, and retrieve commands but not provisioning Retrieve - level 1, allows retrieve and report related commands to be executed; because of its limitations, level 1 is suitable as a login ID for a monitoring process
To execute TL1 commands, you must log in using an account with the sufficient UPC level. Target identifier and source identifier Every TL1 command includes a target identifier (TID) as part of the syntax. The TID is a non-confidential code to identify the network element or network processor being addressed. It is the name of the network element or network processor. If a TID is not entered in the TL1 command, the local TID is substituted. You must enter a TID to send the command to a remote network element or remote network processor. TIDs must be between 1 and 20 alphanumeric characters and are assigned using the SET-SID command. The first character must be a letter. The remaining characters can be any combination of letters, numbers, or dashes (-). Enclose the TID in double quotes () to include any combination of lower case or special characters. The string, enclosed by the double quotes, cannot include the following characters: backslash (\), space, and double quotes (). Note: Source identifier (SID) is the term used to identify the TID in a received message or response. Some TL1 commands accept a TID value of ALL. When you enter the value of ALL, the command is forwarded to each SP or network processor to which you are logged into, through the access port to which the command was sent. Multiple sessions You can use the ACT-USER command to log in to 20 network elements at a time. For more information on multiple sessions, see ACT-USER on page 2-8.
1-6 Introducing TL1
TL1 message notation

The following notation is used to define the syntax of the TL1 messages.
Symbol <cr> <lf> ^ <ctrl> + ; Meaning ASCII carriage return ASCII line feed ASCII space ASCII control key Symbol used in response block syntax Semicolon command or message terminator, used instead of Return to execute commands
Access identifier An access identifier (AID) appears in most command argument strings. The AID identifies the equipment or facilities to be accessed by the command. Correlation tag The TL1 interface requires a sequential command identifier to be used with every command input. The identifier is called a correlation tag (CTAG). If a CTAG is not entered as part of the command, the command will be rejected. The CTAG is returned with all response messages including confirmation, failed and syntax error messages, and retrieved reports. A CTAG is not returned with a scheduled report. Note: An automatically generated message has an automatic tag (ATAG) instead of a CTAG. The ATAG is a unique numeric string generated by the system. The CTAG correlates the command to the result of the command. The format of the CTAG is alphanumeric and can be up to six characters in length. The CTAG can be used to reflect its purpose, for example, JOB28, TAG33. Command structure TL1 commands use a rigid structure. A command always begins with a verb, followed by a hyphen and a modifier. A second hyphen and a secondary modifier may follow. The TID and AID follow, then the CTAG and any additional parameters used by the command: VERB-MODIFIER:TID:AID:CTAG::parameter-list;
Optical Metro 3500
Introducing TL1 1-7
Command elements are separated by punctuation marks, fields by colons (:) and subfields by commas(,). The order of AID, CTAG, and additional parameters can vary from one command group to another. Parameter value grouping TL1 allows the values of some parameters to be grouped. This technique saves time because you enter a single command with multiple values for a particular parameter rather than multiple commands in which the parameter has a single value. The general format for parameter value grouping is <Parameter value 1> &<Parameter value 2> up to a maximum of 33 parameter values in a command. For example: VERB-MODIFIER:tid:aid:ctag::<Parameter value 1>&<Parameter value 2> ...&<Parameter value 33>; Note: The command length cannot exceed 234 characters. Mandatory punctuation TL1 commands use colons and commas as command element separators and a semicolon to terminate the command line. TL1 also uses ampersands (&) as group item separators where command grouping is supported. All punctuation shown in the command descriptions must be used or the command will fail to execute. TL1 command acknowledgment Whenever a TL1 command is entered, the system responds with the letters IP for in progress and the CTAG entered. Until the command either completes successfully or fails, the TL1 prompt does not return. Since no other command can be executed until the prompt returns, the same CTAG can be used in every subsequent command.
TL1 message overview

This section describes the TL1 message types, the common elements present in all TL1 messages, and the responses to TL1 non-autonomous requests. TL1 autonomous messages are also referred to as automatic output (see the RTRV-AO command). TL1 message types There are two types of TL1 messages: autonomous and non-autonomous. Each consists of a header and a message block. Autonomous messages are generated by a network element as a result of activity on the network element (such as alarms, non-alarmed events, protection switch activity, and performance monitoring threshold alerts). These messages are generated automatically. Alarms, events and PM threshold
1-8 Introducing TL1
crossing alerts are broadcast to all user sessions active on the SID. Up to 10 user sessions can be active at one time. No information request is required to receive autonomous messages. Non-autonomous messages are the network element response to a TL1 command. TL1 command response header A response is identified by a two-line header that indicates the origin of the message, time and date, and whether the command successfully executed. The second line always begins with the letter M to indicate it is a response message.
Normal response syntax <cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> M^^<ctag>^COMPLD <cr> <lf> (;|>) Response block
All retrieve commands return a response block <rspblk> in the third line as follows:
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> M^^<ctag>^COMPLD <cr> <lf> <rspblk> (;|>)
The response block contains command-specific details retrieved. The maximum size of the response block is 32 lines. Any response longer than 32 lines is divided into multiple responses. The RTRV-PM commands (except RTRV-PM-ABORT) support a continuation message mechanism. If no PM data is available within 2 minutes, a continuation message is sent to the TL1 session. The continuation message indicates that additional time is required for reporting PM data. The termination character in the last line of the response indicates whether or not complete data has been reported. The continuation message is sent at regular intervals (1 minute and 40 second intervals), until PM data is available. Table 1-1 describes the termination characters for the RTRV-PM response.
Optical Metro 3500
Introducing TL1 1-9 Table 1-1 Termination characters supported in the RTRV-PM response message Termination character semi-colon (;) Description Indicates the termination of the response. All PM data has been reported and the process is complete.
greater than (>) If the current response does not include PM data (in a response block), then the termination character indicates that the current response is a continuation message. PM data will be reported in subsequent response messages. If the current response includes PM data, the termination character indicates that this response contains partial data. Additional PM data will be reported in subsequent response messages. Error responses
If a TL1 command is unsuccessful, a DENY response with a TL1 error is returned. The response includes an error code. The error codes are reported along with a description of the situation under which the problem occurred. The error response follows the syntax:
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> M^^<ctag>^DENY <cr> <lf> ^^^<errcde> <cr> <lf> ^^^/*error text*/ <cr> <lf> ;
Refer to Chapter 6, Error codes and messages.

Autonomous messages format
The network element reports all alarms and events autonomously to all sessions logged in through the TL1 interface. The alarm reports are generated by events or faults in facilities or equipment, environmental faults, or performance monitored threshold crossings. Autonomous reports display a header similar to that of command response headers. The second line begins with either the letter A indicating that it reports an autonomous event, or an alarm code indicating the severity of the alarm. The second element of the second line is always a numeric autonomous tag followed by a report label:
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A|<almcde>^^|^<atag>^REPT^MODIFIER^MODIFIER <cr> <lf> <rspblk> ;
1-10 Introducing TL1
The report label (REPT^MODIFIER^MODIFIER) indicates if a facility, common (COM), environmental (ENV), equipment (EQPT) or shelf (FAC, CONFIG, EX) alarm or event has been generated. The response block (rspblk) is the response to either a command, scheduled report, or fault. It contains several elements to identify the specific nature of the problem. The names and significance of each is specific to the type of report.
Editing features
The Optical Metro 3500 Multiservice Platform supports the following editing features: <ctrl>+a, recalls the last command line to the current line <ctrl>+u, deletes the current command line backspace arrow keys are not supported if the TID is left blank, the TL1 command interpreter fills in the empty space with the default TID
TL1 script file

Starting with Release 11, users can create a script file that contains a series of TL1 commands to be exectued on a target shelf processor or network processor. This script file allows users to execute several, frequently used TL1 commands once. This approach is more efficient than having a user enter each command one at a time. Users must create this script file at a remote location (such as a Unix workstation) with a text editor tool. This file must be in ASCII format and must have the filename tl1scrpt.scr. In order to have several TL1 script files, you must store each script file in a separate directory. Each command in this script file must contain the precise parameters required to successfully execute the command. Each command must also be listed on a new line, separated by carriage returns. There is no limit to the number of TL1 commands that can be included in this script file. The following is an example of syntax contained in a TL1 script file:
ent-fac:ottawa:ilan1:234; ent-fac:ottawa:ilan2:235; clr-alm-secu:ottawa::j345;
TL1 allows users to load a TL1 script file to the network processor and then commit the TL1 script file to the target shelf processor or network processor. By committing the TL1 script file, the user is executing the commands in the TL1 script file to the target shelf processor or network processor.
Optical Metro 3500 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
Introducing TL1 1-11
Note 1: Only commands that complete an action (such as making connections) can be included in the TL1 script file. Retrieve commands cannot be included in this script file. Note 2: Do not include the ACT-USER command in the TL1 script file. When this script file is committed, the network processor automatically logs in to the target shelf processor. Note 3: It is not recommended to include commands in the TL1 script file that require password identification. For information on how to load the TL1 script file, refer to LOAD-TL1SCRPT-NE on page 3-204. For information on how to commit the TL1 script file to a target shelf processor or network processor, refer to CMMT-TL1SCRPT-NE on page 2-86. For information on how to cancel the lodaing or committing of the TL1 script file, refer to CANC-TL1SCRPT-NE on page 2-29.
Online syntax help

The TL1 interface has a built-in help system. When typing TL1 commands you can enter an incomplete command terminated with a question mark (?) at the point where syntax help is needed. The interface responds with syntax choices for that command element. The rule applies throughout the command, from first letter onward. For example entering A?; displays a list of all commands beginning with A. When you log in to a network element, the following message appears indicating some of the online help functions:
Version 16.0: Welcome to NORTEL's Optical Metro 3500 MSP. /* * Starting Interactive TL1 Command Mode. * Type ? for help while constructing TL1 commands. * Type .? for specific parameter/keyword help. */
For example, entering

< RST?
returns the following list:

/* * Applicable Command(s): * * RST-BANNER * RST-EC1 * RST-EQPT * RST-ETH
1-12 Introducing TL1 * RST-FC * RST-OC12 * RST-OC192 * RST-OC3 * RST-OC48 * RST-PROV * RST-T1 * RST-T3 */
The help function can be called at any point in the syntax and the response is always context sensitive. For example, entering
< RST-OC?
returns the following:

/* * Applicable Command(s): * * RST-OC12 * RST-OC192 * RST-OC3 * RST-OC48 */
To get the whole command syntax structure enter

< RST-OC12?
and the following results:

/* * RST-OC12 (Switch OC-12 Facility In Service) ************************************************************** * * Command Syntax: * * RST-OC12:[tid]:aid:ctag; * * Minimum required UPC: 3 * TID = "ALL" supported? NO * * Parameters: * * AID - OC-12 Line Facility To Act Upon */
Optical Metro 3500
Entering a question mark in a specific field such as the TID

< RST-OC12:?
results in a field-specific response as follows:

/* * RST-OC12 (Switch OC-12 Facility In Service) ************************************************************** * * Command Syntax: * * RST-OC12:[tid]:aid:ctag; * * TID (Target Identifier) * Optional * -------------------------------------------------------------* <String> System Identifier (SID) of targeted NE * ex. BUILDING6A, BAYVIEW_CAMPUS, "Harrisburg West" */
The following example illustrates that a question mark can be entered in any field, such as the AID below
< RST-OC12::?
and the response is always context specific:

/* * RST-OC12 (Switch OC-12 Facility In Service) ************************************************************** * * Command Syntax: * * RST-OC12:[tid]:aid:ctag; * * AID Details: * * AID (OC-12 Line Facility To Act Upon) * Mandatory * -------------------------------------------------------------* OC12-Slot Slot = 3..12 */
The TL1 online help function prompts you to enter correct length and content values for all fields in every command and gives examples. The interface specifies if a field should be left null.
Entering a question mark in a field with multiple components returns an explanation of all the components. For example, entering
< ENT-SECU-USER::ADMIN:CTAG123::?
results in the following:

/*
ENT-SECU-USER (Provision New User Account) * Command Syntax: * ENT-SECU-USER:[TID]:newuid:ctag::newpid,newpid,upc: TMOUTA=Domain [,TMOUT=Domain] [,PAGESTAT=Domain] [,PAGE=Domain] [,ACCRSTAT=Domain] [,ACCR=Domain] [, PCND=Domain] [,MINW=Domain] [,USERTYPE=Domain]; * * Parameter Details: * * NEWPID (New Password Identifier) * Mandatory ------------------------------------------------------------* <String> 8-10 password characters * * NEWPID (New Password Identifier) * Mandatory ------------------------------------------------------------* <String> Re-entered NEWPID for confirmation * Hit any key to continue * UPC (User Privilege Code) * Mandatory ------------------------------------------------------------* 1 Retrieve Privileges * 2 Control Privileges * 3 Provisioning Privileges * 4 Administration Privileges * 5 Span of Control Surveillance */
Optical Metro 3500
However entering period+question mark (.?) as follows:

< ENT-SECU-USER::ADMIN:CTAG123::.?
results in the following:

/*
ENT-SECU-USER (Provision New User Account) * Command Syntax: * ENT-SECU-USER:[TID]:newuid:ctag::newpid,newpid,upc: TMOUTA=Domain [,TMOUT=Domain] [,PAGESTAT=Domain] [,PAGE=Domain] [,ACCRSTAT=Domain] [,ACCR=Domain] [, PCND=Domain] [,MINW=Domain] [,USERTYPE=Domain]; * * Parameter Details: * * NEWPID (New Password Identifier) * Mandatory ------------------------------------------------------------* <String> 8-10 password characters */
The response detail is limited to only the first comma delimited parameter (PID) being treated by online help. Any comma delimited parameter can be isolated by the online help system by using period+question mark (.?). Help can be used in the middle of a command parameter as well, to list all commands of a certain type. For example, entering
< ED-S?
returns the following:

/* * Applicable Command(s): * * ED-SECU-PID * ED-SECU-USER * ED-SITE-DSM * ED-STS1 * ED-STS12C * ED-STS24C * ED-STS3C * ED-SYS */
Optical Metro 3500
2-1
Commands A to ED-zz
This chapter covers the TL1 commands from A to ED-zz. For more TL1 commands, see: Part 2 for commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Part 3 for commands RTRV-aa to RTRV-RINGMAP Part 4 for commands RTRV-ROLL-aa to Z
2-
The following table provides an overview of the TL1 commands in this chapter by task. These tasks are listed in alphabetical order.
Task/Command Alarms, events, and external controls commands ALW-MSG-ALL ALW-MSG-BROADCAST DLT-ALM-PROFILE ED-ALM-PROFILE ED-COMM BLSR commands AUD-BLSR CANC-RINGMAP CHK-RINGMAP CMMT-RINGMAP DLT-BLSRRING DLT-RINGMAP ED-BLSRRING 2-22 2-28 2-59 2-67 2-123 2-168 2-197 2-17 2-18 2-120 2-195 2-198 Page
2-2 Commands A to ED-zz Task/Command Cross-connect commands DLT-CRS-STS1 DLT-CRS-STS12C DLT-CRS-STS24C DLT-CRS-STS3C DLT-CRS-STS48C DLT-CRS-VT1 ED-CRS-STS1 ED-CRS-STS12C ED-CRS-STS24C ED-CRS-STS3C ED-CRS-STS48C ED-CRS-VT1 DS1 service module commands ED-SITE-DSM Equipment commands DEFRAG-EQPT DLT-EQPT Facility commands DLT-EC1 DLT-ETH DLT-FC DLT-FFP-OC12 DLT-FFP-OC192 DLT-FFP-OC3 DLT-FFP-OC48 DLT-OC12 DLT-OC192 DLT-OC3 2-142 2-147 2-150 2-151 2-152 2-154 2-155 2-161 2-162 2-163 2-114 2-143 2-319 2-124 2-128 2-131 2-133 2-136 2-138 2-199 2-205 2-209 2-212 2-216 2-219 Page
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-3 Task/Command DLT-OC48 DLT-T1 DLT-T3 ED-DFLT-AINS ED-EC1 ED-ETH ED-FC ED-FFP-OC12 ED-FFP-OC192 ED-FFP-OC3 ED-FFP-OC48 ED-OC12 ED-OC192 ED-OC3 ED-OC48 ED-T1 ED-T3 ED-WAN Facility test signal generation commands CONN-TSTSIG-T1 CONN-TSTSIG-T3 DISC-TSTSIG-T1 DISC-TSTSIG-T3 Inservice traffic rollover commands CMMT-ROLL-STS1 CMMT-ROLL-STS12C CMMT-ROLL-STS24C CMMT-ROLL-STS3C CMMT-ROLL-STS48C 2-68 2-73 2-76 2-79 2-81 2-108 2-111 2-118 2-119 Page 2-164 2-192 2-193 2-225 2-226 2-227 2-232 2-234 2-236 2-238 2-240 2-248 2-251 2-254 2-258 2-331 2-336 2-354
2-4 Commands A to ED-zz Task/Command CMMT-ROLL-VT1 DLT-ROLL-STS1 DLT-ROLL-STS12C DLT-ROLL-STS24C DLT-ROLL-STS3C DLT-ROLL-STS48C DLT-ROLL-VT1 ED-ROLL-STS1 ED-ROLL-STS12C ED-ROLL-STS24C ED-ROLL-STS3C ED-ROLL-STS48C ED-ROLL-VT1 Network processor commands ADD-SOC CLR-LAN-STATS DLT-FAC DLT-GRE DLT-PVC ED-IP ED-LLX25 ED-PTX25 ED-ULX25 ED-VC Packet Edge ring management commands DLT-IPT DLT-IPTR Path and section trace commands ED-STS1 2-320 2-158 2-159 2-10 2-63 2-149 2-157 2-167 2-242 2-246 2-291 2-349 2-352 Page 2-83 2-169 2-174 2-177 2-180 2-183 2-185 2-293 2-297 2-300 2-303 2-307 2-310
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-5 Task/Command ED-STS12C ED-STS24C ED-STS3C Performance monitoring commands ED-PMCONFIG-EC1 ED-PMCONFIG-ETH ED-PMCONFIG-FC ED-PMCONFIG-OC12 ED-PMCONFIG-OC192 ED-PMCONFIG-OC3 ED-PMCONFIG-OC48 ED-PMCONFIG-STS1 ED-PMCONFIG-STS12C ED-PMCONFIG-STS24C ED-PMCONFIG-STS3C ED-PMCONFIG-STS48C ED-PMCONFIG-WAN Protection switching commands ALW-EX-OC12 ALW-EX-OC192 ALW-EX-OC3 ALW-EX-OC48 SDCC commands DLT-LLSDCC ED-LLSDCC ED-ULSDCC (network element) ED-ULSDCC (network processor) Security and administration commands ACT-USER 2-8 2-160 2-243 2-345 2-347 2-11 2-13 2-14 2-16 2-261 2-263 2-265 2-267 2-269 2-271 2-273 2-275 2-278 2-281 2-283 2-286 2-288 Page 2-323 2-325 2-327
2-6 Commands A to ED-zz Task/Command ALW-SECU-CID ALW-SECU-USER CANC-PROV CANC-PROV-SOC CANC-PROV-SP CANC-TL1SCRPT-NE CANC-USER CHK-PROV CHK-PROV-SOC CHK-PROV-SP CLR-ALM-SECU CMMT-PROV CMMT-PROV-SP CMMT-TL1SCRPT-NE DLT-BANNER DLT-PROV DLT-SECU-ACCESS DLT-SECU-BADPID DLT-SECU-USER ED-DAT ED-SECU-PID ED-SECU-USER ED-TOD-MODE Software load installation commands CANC-INSTALL CHK-INSTALL CMMT-INSTALL Software upgrade commands ALW-UPGRD 2-21 2-24 2-50 2-64 Page 2-19 2-20 2-25 2-26 2-27 2-29 2-32 2-51 2-53 2-56 2-62 2-65 2-66 2-86 2-122 2-165 2-189 2-190 2-191 2-224 2-314 2-316 2-343
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-7 Task/Command CANC-UPGRD CHK-UPGRD CMMT-UPGRD DLT-UPGRD System commands ED-NETYPE ED-SYS TARP commands ED-TARP-CONFIG ED-TARP-TBL Test access commands CHG-ACCMD-STS1 CHG-ACCMD-STS12C CHG-ACCMD-STS24C CHG-ACCMD-STS3C CHG-ACCMD-STS48c CHG-ACCMD-T1 CHG-ACCMD-T3 CHG-ACCMD-VT1 CONN-TACC-STS1 CONN-TACC-STS12C CONN-TACC-STS24C CONN-TACC-STS3C CONN-TACC-STS48C CONN-TACC-T1 CONN-TACC-T3 CONN-TACC-VT1 DISC-TACC 2-33 2-36 2-38 2-40 2-42 2-44 2-46 2-48 2-88 2-92 2-94 2-96 2-98 2-100 2-102 2-105 2-116 2-338 2-341 2-247 2-329 Page 2-30 2-60 2-87 2-194
2-8 Commands A to ED-zz
ACT-USER
Use the Activate User command to log in to a network processor or network element. You can log in using remote authentication, challenge-response authentication, or local authentication. To log in using remote or local authentication, you must have a valid user identifier (UID) and password identifier (PID). To log in using challenge-response authentication, enter the UID to partially log in to the network processor or network element. Then, use the RTRV-CHALLENGE and ENTER-CHALLENGE-RESPONSE commands to complete the login. See RTRV-CHALLENGE on page 4-69 and ENT-CHALLENGE-RESPONSE on page 3-12. Up to 100 unique accounts can be created for one network element but only 10 TL1 user sessions using these accounts can be active at one time on one network element. Up to 100 accounts can be created for the network processor as well, but only 34 TL1 user sessions can be active at one time on one network processor. To log out, see the CANC-USER command on page 2-32. You can use ACT-USER to log in to a maximum of 20 network elements at one time. To maintain multiple logins all network elements must be interconnected. Once you have activated sessions to a number of network elements, most TL1 commands can be addressed to all the network elements simultaneously. Note: A maximum of two users can log in locally to the same network element. Once you are connected to a network processor, you can log in to a maximum of 20 network processors or network elements, if the nodes are interconnected. Only one account with level 5 UPC can be active at a time on the network element. Starting with Release 12, up to three Level 5 users can log into and have access to the same network processor at the same time if the UIDs are different. Each of these Level 5 users can access and manage all 16 network elements within the span of control of this network processor. If your password has expired when you log in to a network element with a UPC level of 3 or lower, you only have access to the ED-SECU-PID command. If your password accreditation time has expired when you try to log in to the network element, this command returns a DENY response. Note that, if you log in to a network element with a UPC level of 4 or 5, you are given a warning a specified number of days before your password expires. Password expiry and
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-9
accreditation times are set using the SET-ATTR-SECUDFLT command and retrieved with the RTRV-SECU-DFLT command. See SET-ATTR-SECUDFLT on page 5-196 and RTRV-SECU-DFLT on page 5-40. Security level Level 1 Input syntax
ACT-USER:[TID]:UID:CTAG::[PID]:[DOMAIN=Domain]; Table 2-1 Syntax definition Field TID UID CTAG PID DOMAIN Table 2-2 Parameter definition Parameter Possible values Definition DOMAIN REMOTE CHALLENGE LOCAL Use remote, challenge-response, or local authentication to log in to the network processor or network element. If centralized security administration (CSA) is enabled, you can use remote authentication or challenge-response authentication. If CSA is disabled or is enabled but unavailable, you can use local authentication or challenge-response authentication if local authentication is provisioned as the alternate method. If challenge-response is provisioned as the alternate method, only challenge-response is available (local accounts are disabled). See SET-ATTR-CSA on page 5-189 to set the CSA state and SET-REMAUTH-ALTERNATE on page 5-211 to set the alternate method. Example input Purpose Target identifier User identifier Correlation tag Password identifier Authentication mode
Log in to network element NEWYORK using the account ADMIN:

ACT-USER:NEWYORK:ADMIN:IL123::SESAME;
Note: The password does not appear on screen.

ADD-SOC
The Add Span of Control command is used to add a network element to the NP span of control (SOC). A maximum of 16 network elements can be added to an NP span of control. Security level Level 4 Input syntax
ADD-SOC:[TID]:SID:CTAG::UID,PID; Table 2-3 Syntax definition Field TID SID CTAG UID PID Purpose Target identifier. System identifier. Correlation tag. User identifier of the network element to add to the NP span of control. Password identifier of the network element to add to the NP span of control.
Note 1: If centralized security administration (CSA) is enabled on both the NP and the network element, the command uses only the user identifier. The SOC application will only log in successfully if the NP and network element have the same shared secret. See SET-ATTR-CSA on page 5-189 to provision the CSA state and SET-CHALLENGE-SECRET on page 5-203 to set the shared secret. If CSA is disabled on either the NP or network element, the command uses the user identifier and password identifier. Note 2: The password does not appear on screen. Example input
Add network element NEWYORK to the span of control of OC3NP:

ADD-SOC:OC3NP:NEWYORK:CTAG13::SURVEIL,SURVEIL;
Optical Metro 3500
ALW-EX-OC12
The Allow Exerciser OC-12 command is used to activate the exerciser to test the different protection mechanisms associated with OC-12 line switching in a linear 1+1 protected system. The high-speed exerciser is a routine that tests the integrity of the protection switching bytes (K-bytes) communication between an OC-12 pair configured in a linear 1+1 protected system. The exerciser can run automatically on a predetermined schedule, or it can be initiated manually. The exerciser runs on a pair of OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit packs or on all OC-12/OC-12x4 STS circuit packs in the shelf that are in-service. The pair must be in 1+1 protection for the exerciser to work. Note: If the circuit packs are in a 1+1 linear configuration, there must not be an active protection switch. The exerciser is the lowest priority user command and does not run if a higher priority feature or command is in effect. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ALW-EX-OC12:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-4 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
2-12 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-5 AID descriptions AID type OC-12 AID Command-specific values OC12-slot#-port# OC12-ALL Purpose Identify the OC-12 facility where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9, or 11 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS Identify a single MS DSM termination module, where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
MS DSM AID
OC12-slot-1-%HLINK-OC12Hslot-Hport
Example input
Allow the exerciser for network element SEATTLE to run:

ALW-EX-OC12:SEATTLE:OC12-9-1:CTAG13;
Optical Metro 3500
ALW-EX-OC192
The Allow Exerciser OC-192 command is used to activate the exerciser to test the different protection mechanisms associated with OC-192 line switching in a linear 1+1 or bidirectional line-switched ring (BLSR) protected system. The high-speed exerciser is a routine that tests the integrity of the protection switching bytes (K-bytes) communication between an OC-192 pair configured in a linear 1+1 protected system. The exerciser can run automatically on a predetermined schedule, or it can be initiated manually. The exerciser runs on a pair of in-service OC-192 circuit packs. The pair must be in 1+1 or BLSR protection for the exerciser to work. Note 1: If the OC-192 circuit packs are in a BLSR configuration, they must also have a valid BLSR configuration and no active protection switch. Note 2: If the OC-192 circuit packs are in a 1+1 linear configuration, there must not be an active protection switch. The exerciser is the lowest priority user command and does not run if a higher priority feature or command is in effect. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ALW-EX-OC192:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-6 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 2-7 AID descriptions AID type OC-192 AID Command-specific values OC192-slot# OC192-ALL Purpose Identifies the OC-192 facility slot# = 11 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
Example input

ALW-EX-OC192:SEATTLE:OC192-11:CTAG13;
ALW-EX-OC3
The Allow Exerciser command is used to activate the exerciser to test the different protection mechanisms associated with OC-3 line switching in a linear 1+1 protected system. The high-speed exerciser is a routine that tests the integrity of the protection switching bytes (K-bytes) communication between an OC-3 pair configured in a linear 1+1 protected system. The exerciser can run automatically on a predetermined schedule or can be initiated manually. The exerciser runs on a pair of OC-3x4 circuit packs or on all OC-3x4 circuit packs in the shelf that are in-service. The pair must be in 1+1 protection for the exerciser to work. Note: If the OC-3x4 circuit packs are in a 1+1 linear configuration, there must not be an active protection switch. The exerciser is the lowest priority user command and does not run if a higher priority feature or command is in effect. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ALW-EX-OC3:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-8 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-15 Table 2-9 AID descriptions AID type OC3 AID Command-specific values OC3-slot#-port# OC3-slot#-ALL OC3-ALL OC3-slot#-1-%HLINK-OC3hslot#-hport# Purpose Identify the OC-3 where slot# = 3, 5, 7, and 9 port# = 1 for OC-3, 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4
DSM AID
Example input
Allow the exerciser to run in slot 10 on all ports for network element OSAKA:
ALW-EX-OC3:OSAKA:OC3-10-ALL:CTAG13;
ALW-EX-OC48
The Allow Exerciser OC-48 command is used to activate the exerciser to test the different protection mechanisms associated with OC-48 line switching in a linear 1+1 or bidirectional line-switched ring (BLSR) protected system. The high-speed exerciser is a routine that tests the integrity of the protection switching bytes (K-bytes) communication between an OC-48 pair configured in a linear 1+1 protected system. The exerciser can run automatically on a predetermined schedule or can be initiated manually. The exerciser runs on a pair of OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit packs or on all OC-48/OC-48 STS circuit packs in the shelf that are in-service. The pair must be in 1+1 or BLSR protection for the exerciser to work. Note 1: If the circuit packs are in a BLSR configuration, they must also have a valid BLSR configuration and no active protection switch. Note 2: If the circuit packs are in a 1+1 linear configuration, there must not be an active protection switch. The exerciser is the lowest priority user command and does not run if a higher priority feature or command is in effect. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ALW-EX-OC48:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-10 Sysntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 2-11 AID descriptions AID type OC-48 AID Command-specific values OC48-slot# OC48-ALL Purpose Identifies the OC-48 facility slot# = 11 for OC-48 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 for OC-48 STS Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
Example input

ALW-EX-OC48:SEATTLE:OC48-11:CTAG13; Optical Metro 3500 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
ALW-MSG-ALL
The Allow Messages All command instructs the network element to resume previously inhibited REPTÂLM, REPTÂLMÊNV, REPTÊVT and REPTÊX autonomous messages. These messages are inhibited through the use of the INH-MSG-ALL command. When a TL1 session begins, REPTÂLM, REPTÂLMÊNV, and REPTÊVT messages are allowed by default. To inhibit messages see INH-MSG-ALL. Note: The Allow Messages All command does not resume previously inhibited REPTÊVT^LOG and REPTÊVTÎNVENTORY autonomous messages. To resume these inhibited autonomous messages, use the ALW-MSG-BROADCAST command. Security level Level 1 Input syntax
ALW-MSG-ALL:[TID]:[ALL]:CTAG;
Note: ALL is a valid target identifier (TID).

Table 2-12 Syntax definition Field TID ALL CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier All data Correlation tag
Restart all autonomous message from network element BOSTON3:

ALW-MSG-ALL:BOSTON3:ALL:CTAG12;
ALW-MSG-BROADCAST
The Allow Messages Broadcast command instructs the network element or network processor to resume previously inhibited REPT^DBCHG, REPTÊVT^LOG and REPTÊVTÎNVENTORY autonomous messages. These messages are inhibited through the use of the INH-MSG-BROADCAST command. When a TL1 session begins, REPT^DBCHG, REPTÊVT^LOG and REPTÊVTÎNVENTORY messages are inhibited by default. To inhibit messages see INH-MSG-BROADCAST. Security level Level 1 Input syntax
ALW-MSG-BROADCAST:[TID]::CTAG;

Table 2-13 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag
Turn the autonomous display of REPT^DBCHG, REPTÊVT^LOG and REPTÊVTÎNVENTORY events to on for network element BOSTON:
ALW-MSG-BROADCAST:BOSTON::CTAG12;
Optical Metro 3500
ALW-SECU-CID
The Allow Security Channel Identifier command is used to unlock all channels on the specified network processor that are in a locked out state. Channels are locked out when the maximum number of invalid login attempts is exceeded. Security level Level 4 Input syntax
ALW-SECU-CID:TID:[AID]:CTAG;

Table 2-14 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. This command only supports an AID of ALL. Correlation tag
Example input
Unlock all channels on network processor NEWYORK:

ALW-SECU-CID:NEWYORK:ALL:IL123;
ALW-SECU-USER
The Allow Security User command is used to enable a disabled user account on the network element or network processor. This command is necessary, for example, if password accreditation was turned on using the SET-ATTR-SECUDFLT command and the user failed to changed their password before the specified accreditation time. After an account is enabled, the user is given a warning a specified number of days before their password expires. The warning time is set with the SET-ATTR-SECUDFLT command. Security level Level 4 Input syntax
ALW-SECU-USER:[TID]::CTAG::UID;

Table 2-15 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG UID Example input Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag User identifier. Grouping is allowed.
To enable the account of user EMILY on network element OTTAWA:

ALW-SECU-USER:OTTAWA::CTAG98::EMILY;
Optical Metro 3500
ALW-UPGRD
The Allow Upgrade command is entered on a network element, with parameters specifying the slot for which you want to allow the upgrade. Security level Level 4 Input syntax for SP
ALW-UPGRD:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-16 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Slot number of the card to allow the upgrade Correlation tag
Example input
Allow slot 3 on network element Ottawa to be upgraded:

ALW-UPGRD:OTTAWA:3:CTAG24;
AUD-BLSR
Use the Audit BLSR command to run a configuration and connection audit on one or more network elements in the span of control of the network processor and to set the configuration audit period. Note 1: By default, when you change the audit period, the first audit runs according to the occurrence of the last audit. For example, if you change the audit period to 20 hours and the last audit was 12 hours ago, the next audit would occur 8 hours after you change the audit period. You can specify that the audit run immediately after you change the audit period, rather than according to the last audit. Note 2: When running this command, you must wait 10 seconds before performing this command again, otherwise you will get the message Status Not in Valid State (SNVS). Security level Level 3 Input syntax
AUD-BLSR:[TID]:[AID]:CTAG::[SID]:[AUDPERIOD=Domain] [,RUNAUD=Domain]; Table 2-17 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SID AUDPERIOD RUNAUD Purpose Target identifier Ring name Correlation tag Network element name Audit period Run audit option
Table 2-18 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose
Ring name An alphanumeric string between Identify the ring name 1 and 20 characters
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-23 Table 2-19 Parameter descriptions Parameter SID Possible values Description
An alphanumeric string between Network element name. To run 1 and 20 characters or ALL the audit on all network elements, set this parameter to ALL. 15 to 10080, in increments of 15 Connection audit period in minutes (default is 720). To turn off audits, set this parameter to 0. Y Run the connection audit immediately after entering this command Run the connection audit on schedule after entering this command (default)
AUDPERIOD
RUNAUD
Example input
Audit the BLSR configuration immediately for network element OTTAWA and set the connection audit period to 15 minutes:
AUD-BLSR:NPFGXOTT:RING1:CTAG::OTTAWA:AUDPERIOD=15,RUNAUD=Y;
CANC-INSTALL
The Cancel Install command backs out of the installation of software to a shelf processor. The command removes all load files and provisioning data from the release being installed on the shelf processor, and restores provisioning data and load files to the shelf processor from a specified node. The CANC-INSTALL command can be run after the LOAD-INSTALL or INVK-INSTALL commands. When you run the command after the INVK-INSTALL command, a restart of the shelf processor occurs. After the restart, the status of the installation (retrieved using RTRV-INSTALL-STATE) changes to CANCEL, PASSED. You must run the CANC-INSTALL command again to completely cancel the installation. The status of the installation then changes to CANCEL. After the first CANC-INSTALL command, the system raises a Load Mismatch alarm to indicate that the software loads on the shelf processor and network element do not match. The alarm clears after the second CANC-INSTALL command. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CANC-INSTALL:[TID]::CTAG::RNAME; Table 2-20 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG Purpose Target identifier of the network element that contains the shelf processor Correlation tag
RNAME Remote node name where target release files reside
Table 2-21 Parameter description Parameter Possible values Description RNAME PC string of 1 to 40 alphanumeric characters Locally attached PC Target identifier of the local/remote network element, network processor, or operation controller that contains the load files and provisioning data to restore to the shelf processor
Example input
Cancel the installation of the software on network element OTTAWA:

CANC-INSTALL:OTTAWA::CTAG45::MONTREAL;
Optical Metro 3500
CANC-PROV
The Cancel Provisioning command is used to cancel a SAV-PROV or RST-PROV command in progress on the network element or network processor. In addition it cleans-up any backup files left in an invalid state by the SAV-PROV, or RST-PROV disconnects any file transfer connections left behind by the SAV-PROV or RST-PROV clears any in progress alarms raised by the SAV-PROV, or RST-PROV cancels the failure state that may exist Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CANC-PROV:[TID]::CTAG; Table 2-22 Syntax definitions Field TID CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag
Cancel a SAV-PROV command executed on shelf processor OTTAWA:

CANC-PROV:OTTAWA::CTAG99;
CANC-PROV-SOC
The Cancel Provisioning Span of Control (CANC-PROV-SOC) command is used to cancel a SAV-PROV-SOC or CHK-PROV-SOC command in progress on the network processor. In addition it cleans-up any backup files left in an invalid state by the SAV-PROV-SOC command. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CANC-PROV-SOC:[TID]::CTAG; Table 2-23 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag
Cancel a SAV-PROV-SOC command executed on network processor OTTAWA:

CANC-PROV-SOC:OTTAWA::CTAG99;
Optical Metro 3500
CANC-PROV-SP
The Cancel Provisioning command is used to cancel a SAV-PROV-SP or RST-PROV-SP command in progress on the shelf processor. In addition, this command cleans-up any backup files left in an invalid state by the SAV-PROV-SP or RST-PROV-SP command disconnects any file transfer connections left behind by the SAV-PROV-SP or RST-PROV-SP command clears any in progress alarms raised by the SAV-PROV-SP or RST-PROV-SP command clears any exclusion locks left by the SAV-PROV-SP or RST-PROV-SP command Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CANC-PROV-SP:[TID]::CTAG:::[TRGTID=Domain]; Table 2-24 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG TRGTID Example input Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Target ID
Cancel a SAV-PROV-SP command executed on shelf processor OTTAWA:

CANC-PROV-SP:OTTAWA::CTAG99;
CANC-RINGMAP
Use the Cancel Ring Map command to cancel the previous provisioning change and apply the original ring map. This command is supported on the network processor. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CANC-RINGMAP:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-25 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 2-26 AID descriptions AID type Ring name Command-specific values Purpose Purpose Target identifier. Ring name Correlation tag
An alphanumeric string between 1 Identify the ring name and 20 characters
Example input
Cancel the previous ring map provisioning for NPFGXOTT:

CANC-RINGMAP:NPFGXOTT:RING1:CTAG12;
Optical Metro 3500
CANC-TL1SCRPT-NE
The Cancel TL1 Script Network Element command is used to cancel the download of the TL1 script file to the network processor. In addition, this command clears alarms related to the LOAD-TL1-SCRPT-NE command deletes the TL1 script file from the NP clears any exclusion locks left by the LOAD-TL1-SCRPT-NE command Note: The CANC-TL1SCRPT-NE command cannot be used to cancel a CMMT-TL1SCRPT-NE command. Security level Level 4 Input syntax
CANC-TL1SCRPT-NE:[TID]::CTAG; Table 2-27 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag
Cancel the download of the TL1 script file to the network processor OTTAWA:
CANC-TL1SCRPT-NE:OTTAWA::CTAG99;
CANC-UPGRD
The Cancel Upgrade command allows you to back out of the upgrade, if a commit upgrade command has not been issued. Security level Level 3 Input syntax for shelf processor
CANC-UPGRD:[TID]:[AID]:CTAG::RNAME;
Input syntax for network processor

CANC-UPGRD:[TID]::CTAG; Table 2-28 Syntax definition Field TID AID Purpose Target identifier Slot number of the card you were upgrading (to be used for slot upgrade only). Note: If the AID parameter is used, the RNAME parameter is not required. CTAG RNAME Correlation tag Remote node name (applies to the shelf processor only)
Table 2-29 Parameter descriptions Parameter RNAME Description The RNAME parameter applies to the shelf processor only. The name of the node from which the old loads are retrieved. The node can be of different types: OC3NE: RNAME = the remote TID (7-20 characters) OC3NP: RNAME = the remote TID (7-20 characters) OPC: RNAME = the name of the remote OPC To obtain old loads from the PC using the RS-232 port: PC: RNAME = "PC" Note: OC3NE is valid only for network element upgrade.
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-31 Example input
Cancel the upgrade of node Ottawa, using network processor Montreal:

CANC-UPGRD:OTTAWA::CTAG24::MONTREAL;
Cancel the upgrade of network processor Toronto:

CANC-UPGRD:TORONTO::CTAG12;
Cancel the upgrade of slot 3 of node Ottawa:

CANC-UPGRD:OTTAWA:3:CTAG26;
CANC-USER
The Cancel User command is used to log out of an active session with the network element or network processor. Regardless of privilege, no account can be logged out by a CANC-USER command from a different user account. However an INIT-WARM and INIT-COLD command will log out all currently active sessions. Note: The UID must be used to log out any account. If a user remains logged in to an account on the local network element and another user wants to log the user out but does not know the UID of the first user, the only way to log out the account is to disconnect the appropriate cable (RS-232, LAN, or X.25) from the craft access port, or turn off the power to the VT100 terminal. Security level Level 1 Input syntax
CANC-USER:[TID]:UID:CTAG;

Table 2-30 Syntax definition Field TID UID CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier User identifier Correlation tag
Log out SYSOP from the network element WASHINGTON:

CANC-USER:WASHINGTON:SYSOP:TN777;
Optical Metro 3500
CHG-ACCMD-STS1
The Change Access Mode command is used to transition from a monitor test access session to a split test access session on a STS-1 facility. All connections should be monitored before splitting the connection. After successful completion of the CONN-TACC-STS1 command, the test access session is in the monitor state and can be split with the CHG-ACCMD-STS1 command. Once the test access session is in the split state, it can be either disconnected with DISC-TACC command or set back to the monitor state using the CHG-ACCMD-STS1 command. Note: For a listing of supported mode transitions, see Table 2-31. For a listing of supported cross-connect types for split test access sessions, see Table 2-32.
Table 2-31 Supported mode transitions From/To MONE MONE MONF MONEF SPLTE SPLTF SPLTEF SPLTA Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No No Yes No No No No No No No MONF Yes MONEF No No SPLTE Yes Yes No SPLTF Yes Yes No No SPLTEF No No Yes No No SPLTA Yes Yes No No No No
Table 2-32 Supported test access cross-connect types (split mode) Cross-connect type/Mode
1WAY (Unidirectional) 2WAY(Bidirectional) 1WAYPR (Unidirectional Path Ring) 2WAYPR (Bidirectional Path Ring) 2WAYBR (Bidirectional Bridge Ring) FFP (Facility Protection Group) SPLTE SPLTF SPLTEF SPLTA
No Yes No Yes Yes Yes
No Yes No No No No
No Yes No No No No
Yes Yes No No No No
Security level Level 3 Input syntax

CHG-ACCMD-STS1:[TID]:TAPAID:CTAG::MODE; Table 2-33 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG TAPAID MODE Table 2-34 AID descriptions TAPAID type STS-1 Facility AID Possible values EC1-slot#-port# Description slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port# = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 slot# = 3, 5, 7 or 9 port# = 1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3/EC-1x12 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 to 12 slot# = 3 to 10 sts# = 1 to 48 slot# = 3, 5, 7 or 9 port# = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Test access port access identifier. STS-1 to act on. Mode of test access session
DS3-slot#-port#
OC3-slot#-port#-sts#
OC48-slot#-sts# MS DSM STS-1 Facility AID DS3-slot#-port#%HLINK-Hline-hslot#hport#
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-35 Table 2-35 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values MODE MONE MONF MONEF SPLTE SPLTF SPLTEF SPLTA Example input Description Monitor receive path at from end. Monitor receive path at to end. Monitor receive path at both from and to ends. Split path at from end. Split path at to end. Split path at both from and to ends. Split forward path
Transition from the monitor test access mode to the split test access mode on the receive path at the from end or originating point of the path on an STS-1 facility.
CHG-ACCMD-STS1:NEWYORK:DS3-5-3:CAKE23::SPLTE;
CHG-ACCMD-STS12C
The Change Access Mode command is used to transition from a monitor test access session to a split test access session on a STS-12c facility. All connections should be monitored before splitting the connection. After successful completion of the CONN-TACC-STS12C command, the test access session is in the monitor state and can be split with the CHG-ACCMD-STS12C command. Once the test access session is in the split state, it can be either disconnected with DISC-TACC command or set back to the monitor state using the CHG-ACCMD-STS12C command. Note: For a listing of supported mode transitions, see Table 2-31 on page 2-33. For a listing of supported cross-connect types for split test access sessions, see Table 2-32 on page 2-33. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CHG-ACCMD-STS12C:[TID]:TAPAID:CTAG::MODE; Table 2-36 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG TAPAID MODE Table 2-37 AID descriptions TAPAID type STS-12c Facility AID Possible values OC12-slot#-port#-sts# Description slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 sts# = 1,13, 25, 37 Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Test access port access identifier. STS-12c to act on. Mode of test access session
Optical Metro 3500
Transition from the monitor test access mode to the split test access mode on the receive path at the from end or originating point of the path on an STS-12c facility.
CHG-ACCMD-STS12C:NEWYORK:OC12-3-1-1:CAKE23::SPLTE;
CHG-ACCMD-STS24C
CHG-ACCMD-STS24C:[TID]:TAPAID:CTAG::MODE; Table 2-39 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG TAPAID MODE Table 2-40 AID descriptions TAPAID type STS-24c Facility AID Possible values OC48-slot#-sts# Description slot# = 3 to 10 sts# = 1, 25 Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Test access port access identifier. STS-24c to act on. Mode of test access session
Optical Metro 3500
CHG-ACCMD-STS24C:NEWYORK:OC48-5-1:CAKE23::SPLTE;
CHG-ACCMD-STS3C
CHG-ACCMD-STS3C:[TID]:TAPAID:CTAG::MODE; Table 2-42 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG TAPAID MODE Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Test access port access identifier. STS-3c to act on. Mode of test access session
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-41 Table 2-43 AID descriptions TAPAID type STS-3c Facility AID Possible values OC3-slot#-port#-sts# Description slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1,4,7,10 slot# = 3 to 10 sts# = 1,4,7, ... 46
OC48-slot#-sts#
Table 2-44 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values MODE MONE MONF MONEF SPLTE SPLTF SPLTEF SPLTA Example input Description Monitor receive path at from end. Monitor receive path at to end. Monitor receive path at both from and to ends. Split path at from end. Split path at to end. Split path at both from and to ends. Split forward path
CHG-ACCMD-STS3C:NEWYORK:OC3-5-3-1:CAKE23::SPLTE;
CHG-ACCMD-STS48c
The Change Access Mode command is used to transition from a monitor test access session to a split test access session on a STS-48c facility. All connections should be monitored before splitting the connection. After successful completion of the CONN-TACC-STS48C command, the test access session is in the monitor state and can be split with the CHG-ACCMD-STS48c command. Once the test access session is in the split state, it can be either disconnected with DISC-TACC command or set back to the monitor state using the CHG-ACCMD-STS48c command. Note: For a listing of supported mode transitions, see Table 2-31 on page 2-33. For a listing of supported cross-connect types for split test access sessions, see Table 2-32 on page 2-33. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CHG-ACCMD-STS48C:[TID]:TAPAID:CTAG::MODE; Table 2-45 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG TAPAID MODE Table 2-46 AID descriptions TAPAID type STS-48c Facility AID Possible values OC48-slot#-sts# Description slot# = 3 to 10 sts# = 1 Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Test access port access identifier. STS-48c to act on. Mode of test access session
Optical Metro 3500
CHG-ACCMD-STS48C:NEWYORK:OC48-3-1:CAKE23::SPLTE;
CHG-ACCMD-T1
The Change Access Mode command is used to transition from a monitor test access session to a split test access session on a DS1 facility. All connections should be monitored before splitting the connection. After successful completion of the CONN-TACC-T1 command, the test access session is in the monitor state and can be split with the CHG-ACCMD-T1 command. Once the test access session is in the split state, it can be either disconnected with DISC-TACC command or set back to the monitor state using the CHG-ACCMD-T1 command. Note: For a listing of supported mode transitions, see Table 2-31 on page 2-33. For a listing of supported cross-connect types for split test access sessions, see Table 2-32 on page 2-33. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CHG-ACCMD-T1:[TID]:TAPAID:CTAG::MODE; Table 2-48 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG TAPAID MODE Table 2-49 AID descriptions TAPAID type DS1 AID DS3V AID DSM AID Possible values DS1-slot#-port# DS1-slot#-port#-t1# DS1-1-port#-%HLINKHLINE-hslot#-hport# Description slot# =4 to 10, port# =1 to 12 slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28 port# = 1 to 84, hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 HLINE = OC3 or OC12 Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Test access port access identifier. DS1 to act on. Mode of test access session
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-45 Table 2-49 (continued) AID descriptions TAPAID type VT1.5 facility AID Possible values EC1-slot#-port#-vtg#-vt# Description slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port# = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts#= 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 sts#= 1 to 12 vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4
OC3 AID
OC3-slot#-port#-sts#vtg#-vt#
OC12 AID
Table 2-50 Parameter descriptions Parameter MODE Possible values MONE MONF MONEF SPLTE SPLTF SPLTEF SPLTA Example input Description Monitor receive path at from end. Monitor receive path at to end. Monitor receive path at both from and to ends. Split path at from end. Split path at to end. Split path at both from and to ends. Split forward path
Transition from the split test access mode to the monitor test access mode on the receive path at the to end or end point of the path on a DS-1 facility.
CHG-ACCMD-T1:NEWYORK:DS1-10-3:CAKE23::MONF;
CHG-ACCMD-T3
The Change Access Mode command is used to transition from a monitor test access session to a split test access session on a DS-3 facility. All connections should be monitored before splitting the connection. After successful completion of the CONN-TACC-T3 command, the test access session is in the monitor state and can be split with the CHG-ACCMD-T3 command. Once the test access session is in the split state, it can be either disconnected with DISC-TACC command or set back to the monitor state using the CHG-ACCMD-T3 command. Note: For a listing of supported mode transitions, see Table 2-31 on page 2-33. For a listing of supported cross-connect types for split test access sessions, see Table 2-32 on page 2-33. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CHG-ACCMD-T3:[TID]:TAPAID:CTAG::MODE; Table 2-51 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG TAPAID MODE Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Test access port access identifier. DS3 to act on. Mode of test access session
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-47 Table 2-52 AID description TAPAID type T3 Facility AID Possible values EC1-slot#-port# Description slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port# = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 slot# = 3,5,7,9, port# = 1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3/EC-1x12 slot# = 3 or 5; port# = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot# = 3 to10 Hport# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 sts# = 1 to 12 slot# = 3 to 10 sts# = 1 to 48
DS3-slot#-port#
DS3-slot#-port#-%HLINKHline-Hslot#-Hport#
OC48-slot#-sts#
Table 2-53 Parameter descriptions Parameter MODE Possible values MONE MONF MONEF SPLTE SPLTF SPLTEF SPLTA Example input Description Monitor receive path at from end. Monitor receive path at to end. Monitor receive path at both from and to ends. Split path at from end. Split path at to end. Split path at both from and to ends. Split forward path.
Transition from the split test access mode to the monitor test access mode on the receive path at the to end or end point of the path on a DS-3 facility.
CHG-ACCMD-T3:NEWYORK:DS3-9-3:CAKE23::MONF;
CHG-ACCMD-VT1
The Change Access Mode command is used to transition from a monitor test access session to a split test access session on a VT1.5 facility. All connections should be monitored before splitting the connection. After successful completion of the CONN-TACC-VT1 command, the test access session is in the monitor state and can be split with the CHG-ACCMD-VT1 command. Once the test access session is in the split state, it can be either disconnected with DISC-TACC command or set back to the monitor state using the CHG-ACCMD-VT1 command. Note: For a listing of supported mode transitions, see Table 2-31 on page 2-33. For a listing of supported cross-connect types for split test access sessions, see Table 2-32 on page 2-33. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CHG-ACCMD-VT1:[TID]:TAPAID:CTAG::MODE; Table 2-54 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG TAPAID MODE Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Test access port access identifier. VT1.5 to act on. Mode of test access session
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-49 Table 2-55 AID description TAPAID type VT1.5 facility AID Possible values DS1-slot#-port# DS1-slot#-port#-t1# Description slot# =4 to 10, port# =1 to 12 slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28
DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-Hline port# = 1 to 84, hslot# = 3 to 10 -hslot#-hport# hport# = 1 to 4 EC1-slot#-port#-vtg#-vt# slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port# = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts#= 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 sts#= 1 to 12 vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4
Table 2-56 Parameter descriptions Parameter MODE Possible values description MONE MONF MONEF SPLTE SPLTF SPLTEF SPLTA Example input Monitor receive path at from end. Monitor receive path at to end. Monitor receive path at both from and to ends. Split path at from end. Split path at to end. Split path at both from and to ends. Split forward path
Transition from the split test access mode to the monitor test access mode on the receive path at the to end or end point of the path.
CHG-ACCMD-VT1:NEWYORK:DS1-10-3:CAKE23::MONF;
CHK-INSTALL
The Check Installation command verifies that the installation of a new software release to the shelf processor is possible and that a specified node can provide the necessary load. For the check to be successful: The software loads on the shelf processor and on the network element that contains the shelf processor must be different The software loads on the specified node and on the network element that contains the shelf processor must be the same The software load on the network element that contains the shelf processor must not be indeterminate (the circuit packs on the network element must all have the same software release) Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CHK-INSTALL:[TID]::CTAG::RNAME; Table 2-57 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG Purpose Target identifier of the network element that contains the shelf processor Correlation tag
RNAME Target identifier of the node (local/remote network element, network processor, or operation controller) that contains the load files and provisioning data to install on the shelf processor
Table 2-58 Parameter description Parameter RNAME Possible values PC string of 1 to 40 alphanumeric characters Example input Description Locally attached PC Remote node name where target release files reside.
Check the installation of the new software on network element OTTAWA:

CHK-INSTALL:OTTAWA::CTAG45::MONTREAL;
Optical Metro 3500
CHK-PROV
The Check Provisioning command is used to do pre-checks on the shelf processor or network processor for which the provisioning data is to be saved or restored. These checks include whether the given destination is reachable (if the DESTTYPE and DESTADDR options are included). If the file transfer connection cannot be made or if the destination is involved in a duplicate SID, the check fails. Note: the system is in one of the following preventative states - upgrade in progress - load mismatch - inservice rollover in progress (shelf processor only) - disk is full (network processor only) - duplicate source identifier (SID) - database save and restore in progress - database save and restore has failed If the system is in a preventative state the check fails. any alarms are raised on the shelf processor or network processor (if the CHKALM option is omitted or given the value Y). If any alarms are raised on the shelf processor or network processor the check fails. The CHK-PROV command, although optional, should always be sent before sending a SAV-PROV or a RST-PROV to a shelf processor or network processor. Note: Only one save and restore command can occur at a time, with the exception of CANC-PROV. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CHK-PROV:[TID]::CTAG:::[DESTTYPE=Domain][,DESTADDR=Domain] [,CHKALM=Domain]; Table 2-59 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag
2-52 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-59 (continued) Syntax definition Field DESTTYPE DESTADDR Purpose Source of the Restore TID, IP, or locally attached PC Destination address Address of the Destination type (TID or IP) which is the destination of the Save or source of the Restore. For a DESTTYPE of PC, omit DESTADDR. CHKALM Check active alarms
Table 2-60 Parameter descriptions Parameter DESTTYPE Possible values Description TID IP PC DESTADDR TID address IP address Target Identifier Internet Protocol Locally attached PC Name of the network element, network processor, or OPC A network element or network processor identifier in the format x.x.x.x (where x = a number from 1-255) A CHK-PROV is not allowed if there is an alarm present on the network processor or shelf processor card receiving the command A CHK-PROV is allowed whether or not there is an alarm present on the network processor or shelf processor card receiving the command. If the CHK-PROV command is sent with the CHKALM=N and some preventative states exist, the command will fail.
CHKALM
Y (default)
Example input
Check network processor MONTREAL prior to saving its provisioning data to a UNIX workstation:
CHK-PROV:MONTREAL::CTAG98:::DESTTYPE=IP,DESTADDR=47.124.9.88, CHKALM=Y;
or
CHK-PROV:MONTREAL::CTAG98:::DESTTYPE=TID,DESTADDR=OPCOTTAWA, CHKALM=Y;
Optical Metro 3500
CHK-PROV-SOC
The Check Provisioning Span of Control (CHK-PROV-SOC) command is used to do pre-checks on the network processor to ensure that it can save the provisioning data from all of the shelf processors in its span of control (SOC) to a given destination. These checks include whether the given destination is reachable (if the DESTTYPE and DESTADDR options are included). The given destination can be a remote location with a TID or IP address. If the file transfer connection cannot be made or if the destination is involved in a duplicate SID, the check fails. the system is in one of the following preventative states - upgrade in progress - load mismatch - inservice rollover in progress (shelf processor only) - disk is full (network processor only) - duplicate source identifier (SID) - database save and restore in progress - database save and restore has failed If the system is in a preventative state the check fails. any alarms are raised on the shelf processor or network processor (if the CHKALM option is omitted or given the value Y). If any alarms are raised on the shelf processor or network processor the check fails. The CHK-PROV-SOC command, although optional, should always be sent before sending a SAV-PROV-SOC to a shelf processor or network processor. Note 1: Only one save and restore command can occur at a time, with the exception of CANC-PROV. Note 2: If the given destination is a remote location, the CHK-PROV-SOC command cannot check if there is sufficient disk space at the remote location to download the provisioning data. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CHK-PROV-SOC:[TID]::CTAG::[USERID][,PASSWRD]: [DESTTYPE=Domain],[DESTADDR=Domain][,DIR=Domain] [,CHKALM=Domain];
2-54 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-61 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG USERID PASSWRD DESTTYPE DESTADDR DIR CHKALM Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag User ID (see Note) Users password (see Note) Destination type (TID or IP) Destination address. Address of the Destination type (TID or IP) which is the destination of the Save or source of the Restore. Directory in which the backed-up provisioning data is stored (see Note) Check alarm status
Note: Do not specify a user ID, password or directory if the remote location is an Operations Controller. Table 2-62 Parameter descriptions Parameter DESTTYPE Possible values TID IP DESTADDR TID address IP address CHKALM Y (default) N Description Target Identifier Internet Protocol Name of remote location A remote location identifier in the format x.x.x.x (where x = a number from 1-255) A CHK-PROV-SOC is not allowed if there is an alarm present on the network processor or shelf processor card receiving the command A CHK-PROV-SOC is allowed whether or not there is an alarm present on the network processor or shelf processor card receiving the command. If the CHK-PROV-SOC command is sent with the CHKALM=N and some preventative states exist, the command will fail.
Optical Metro 3500
Check network processor MONTREAL prior to saving its provisioning data to a remote UNIX workstation:
CHK-PROV-SOC:MONTREAL::CTAG98::jim,password:DESTTYPE=IP, DESTADDR=47.202.198.105,DIR=/home/saverest,CHKALM=Y;
Check network processor MONTREAL prior to saving its provisioning data to to the Operations Controller of network element TORONTO:
CHK-PROV-SOC:MONTREAL::CTAG98:::DESTTYPE=TID,DESTADDR=TORONTO, CHKALM=Y;
CHK-PROV-SP
The Check Provisioning Shelf Processor command is used to determine whether there are preventative states on the shelf processor for which the provisioning data is to be saved (with the SAV-PROV-SP command) or restored (with RST-PROV-SP command). These preventative states include upgrade in progress in-service rollover on the SP reconfiguration or BLSR configuration in progress provisioning of data in progress FPGA download in progress transmit data recovery failed SP version mismatch loads mismatch database corruption load install disk full shelf ID mismatch duplicate SID on the SP or NP database save and restore in progress exclusion lock on the save and restore directory remote destination is not reachable with the given user name and password from the NP if the destination information is provided If the system is in one of these preventative states, the check fails. The CHK-PROV-SP command, although optional, should always be sent before sending a SAV-PROV-SP command to a shelf processor. Note: If the given destination is a remote location, the CHK-PROV-SP command cannot check if there is sufficient disk space at the remote location to download the provisioning data. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CHK-PROV-SP:[TID]::CTAG::[USERID][,PASSWRD]:TRGTID=Domain DESTTYPE=Domain,DESTADDR=Domain[,DIR=Domain] [,CHKALM=Domain];
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-57 Table 2-63 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG USERID PASSWRD TRGTID DESTTYPE DESTADDR Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag User ID (see Note) Users password (see Note) Targeted TID (the SP for which the NP is required to acted upon) Destination type (TID or IP) Destination address Address of the Destination type (TID or IP) which is the destination of the Save or source of the Restore. DIR CHKALM Directory in which the backed-up provisioning data is stored (see Note) Check alarm status
Note: Do not specify a user ID, password or directory if the remote location is an Operations Controller. Table 2-64 Parameter descriptions Parameter DESTTYPE Possible values TID IP DESTADDR TID address IP address CHKALM Y (default) Description Target Identifier Internet Protocol Name of remote location A remote location identifier in the format x.x.x.x (where x = a number from 1-255) A CHK-PROV-SP is not allowed if there is an alarm present on the shelf processor card receiving the command A CHK-PROV-SP is allowed whether or not there is an alarm present on the shelf processor card receiving the command. If the CHK-PROV-SP command is sent with the CHKALM=N and some preventative states exist, the command will fail.
2-58 Commands A to ED-zz Example input
Check shelf processor MONTREAL prior to saving its provisioning data to a remote Unix workstation:
CHK-PROV-SP:MONTREAL::CTAG98::jim,password: TRGTID=MONTREALNP ,DESTTYPE=IP, DESTADDR=47.202.198.105,DIR=/home/saverest,CHKALM=Y;
or Check shelf processor MONTREAL prior to saving its provisioning data to the Operations Controller of network element TORONTO:
CHK-PROV-SP:MONTREAL::CTAG98:::TRGTID=MONTREALNP DESTTYPE=TID,DESTADDR=TORONTO,CHKALM=Y;
Optical Metro 3500
CHK-RINGMAP
Use the Check Ring Map command to verify map information for a BLSR ring. This command is supported on the network processor and shelf processor. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CHK-RINGMAP:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-65 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 2-66 AID descriptions AID type Ring name Command-specific values Purpose Purpose Target identifier. Ring name Correlation tag
Example input
Verify the ring map information for the BLSR RING1:

CHK-RINGMAP:NPFGXOTT:RING1:CTAG;
CHK-UPGRD
The Check Upgrade command is entered with parameters specifying the new release number and where to get the files containing the new loads (PC, OPC, another network element). When CHK-UPGRD is issued from the network element user interface, the shelf processor checks if the specified location is reachable and does a pre-upgrade check to see if the network element can be upgraded. When CHK-UPGRD is issued from the network processor user interface, the network processor checks if the specified location is reachable and does a pre-upgrade check to see if the network processor can be upgraded. When CHK-UPGRD is issued from the network element user interface and it specifies a slot number, the shelf processor does a pre-upgrade check to see if the slot can be upgraded. Security level Level 3 Input syntax for NP
CHK-UPGRD:[TID]::CTAG::RNAME,RELNO;
Input syntax for SP

CHK-UPGRD:[TID]:[AID]:CTAG::RNAME,RELNO; Table 2-67 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-61 Table 2-67 (continued) Syntax definition Field AID Purpose Slot number of the card to upgrade (to be used for slot upgrade only). Note: If the AID parameter is used, the RELNO and RNAME parameters are not required. RNAME The name of the node from which the new loads are retrieved. The node can be of the following types: OC3NE: RNAME = the remote TID (7-20 characters) OC3NP: RNAME = the remote TID (7-20 characters) OPC: RNAME = the name of the remote OPC For upgrade from a PC using the RS-232 port: PC: RNAME = "PC" For upgrade from the local file system: file system: RNAME = the local TID (7-20 characters) Note: OC3NE is valid only for network element upgrade. RELNO An ASCII string identifying the release number to upgrade to
Example input
Check that network element Ottawa can be upgraded from network element TORONTO:
CHK-UPGRD:OTTAWA::CTAG24::TORONTO,NTNA6021;
Check that OC3NP can be upgraded from another network processor:

CHK-UPGRD:OC3NP::CTAG25::OC3NP2,NTNA6021;
Check that slot 3 of network element Ottawa can be upgraded:

CHK-UPGRD:OTTAWA:3:CTAG26;
CLR-ALM-SECU
The Clear Alarm Security command is used to clear all security alarms on the specified network element or network processor. Security level Level 4 Input syntax
CLR-ALM-SECU:[TID]::CTAG;

Table 2-68 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag
Clear all security alarms on network element OTTAWA:

CLR-ALM-SECU:OTTAWA::CTAG93;
Optical Metro 3500
CLR-LAN-STATS
The Clear ILAN Statistics command is used to clear ILAN1 or COLAN error statistics on the specified network processor ILAN error statistics on the specified network element Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CLR-LAN-STATS:[TID]:AID:CTAG;

Table 2-69 Syntax definition Field TID AID Purpose Target identifier of the network element or network processor Type of error statistic to clear. For a network processor, possible values are ILAN1 or COLAN. For a network element, the only possible value is ILAN. CTAG Example input Correlation tag
Clear all ILAN error statistics on network element OTTAWA:

CLR-ILAN-STATS:OTTAWA:ILAN:CTAG93;
CMMT-INSTALL
The Commit Installation command causes the new software load on the shelf processor to become permanent. The command removes any files and provisioning data from the previous load. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CMMT-INSTALL:[TID]::CTAG; Table 2-70 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG Purpose Target identifier of the network element that contains the shelf processor Correlation tag
Example input
Commit the installation of the software on network element OTTAWA:

CMMT-INSTALL:OTTAWA::CTAG45;
Optical Metro 3500
CMMT-PROV
The Commit Provisioning (CMMT-PROV) command is used to commit the files which have been restored to a shelf processor or network processor by the RST-PROV command. The CMMT-PROV command checks to see if there are any outstanding reasons not to commit the data at this time. If there are no reasons, it will commit the data and cause a special reset. It will also clear the Database Restore in Progress alarm. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CMMT-PROV:[TID]::CTAG; Table 2-71 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag
Commit provisioning data that has been restored to shelf processor OTTAWA:
CMMT-PROV:OTTAWA::CTAG93;
CMMT-PROV-SP
The Commit Provisioning SP command is used to commit the files which have been restored from a remote location with a TID or IP address to a shelf processor by the RST-PROV-SP command. The CMMT-PROV-SP command checks to see if there are any outstanding reasons not to commit the data at this time. If there are no reasons, this command will commit the data. This command is completed on the designated shelf processor after an autonomous save and restore restart is performed. This restart consists of a warm restart of the shelf processor and the tributary circuit packs. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CMMT-PROV-SP:[TID]::CTAG:::[TRGTID=Domain]; Table 2-72 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag
Commit provisioning data that has been restored to shelf processor MONTREAL:
CMMT-PROV-SP:MONTREAL::CTAG93;
Optical Metro 3500
CMMT-RINGMAP
Use the Commit Ring Map command to copy the temporary ring map to the permanent ring map. This command is supported on the network processor. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CMMT-RINGMAP:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-73 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 2-74 AID descriptions AID type Ring name Command-specific values Purpose Purpose Target identifier. Ring name Correlation tag
Example input
Commit the ring map provisioning for NPFGXOTT:

CMMT-RINGMAP:NPFGXOTT:RING1:CTAG;
CMMT-ROLL-STS1
The Commit Rollover STS-1 command is used to delete the original STS-1 path. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CMMT-ROLL-STS1:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=Domain,RTO=Domain[,CMMTSWMATE=Domain]; Table 2-75 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints Second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled (see Note) AID RFROM is to be rolled to (see Note)
CMMTSWMATE Deletes the original switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit Note: When rolling a switch mate, RFROM=OLDSWMATE, RTO=NEWSWMATE.
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-69 Table 2-76 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-1 facility on a DS3 circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3/EC-1x12 Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-3 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3
STS1 DS3-slot#-port# facility AID
OC12-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 to 12 OC48-slot#-sts# Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot # = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1 to 48
2-70 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-76 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11 or 12 sts# = 1 to 192 Identify the STS-1 facility on an EC-1 circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port# = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12
STS1 OC192-slot#-sts# facility AID
EC1-slot#-port#
WAN-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-1 facility on the WAN port where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 for 2x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 3 for 4x100FX-P2Por 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 21 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P Note: The WAN AID only applies to the fromAID and toAID fields. The WAN AID does not apply to the RFROM and RTO fields. STS1 OC3-1-1-sts-%HLINK Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-3 circuit facility AID -OC3-Hslot#-Hport# pack where on DSM Hslot# = 3 to 10 Hport# = 1 to 4
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-71 Table 2-76 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose slot = 3 or 5 port = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4 slot = 3 to 6; port = 1 to 8; sts = 1 to 3 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4 grp = 1 to 3 where grp 1 =DS1s 1 to 28, grp 2 = DS1s 29 to 56, grp 3 = DS1s 57 to 84 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4
DS3-slot-portSTS1 facility AID %HLINK-Hline-HslotHport on MS DSM WAN-slot-port-sts%HLINK-Hline-HslotHport STSMDS1-grp%HLINK-Hline-HslotHport
Table 2-77 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values Description 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR CMMTSWMATE Y N (default) Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate.
Example input
Rollover an STS1 working connection on the OC-3x4 circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between a DS3 service and the OC-3x4 circuit pack. Bridge the original OC-3 working connection:
ENT-ROLL-STS1:OTTAWA:OC3-9-2-1,DS3-3-1:A::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-2-1,RTO=OC3-9-3-1,VALID=Y;
Switch to the bridge connection:

ED-ROLL-STS1:OTTAWA:OC3-9-2-1,DS3-3-1:B::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-2-1,RTO=OC3-9-3-1,VALID=Y:SWITCHED;
Remove the original working connection:

CMMT-ROLL-STS1:OTTAWA:OC3-9-2-1,DS3-3-1:C::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-2-1,RTO=OC3-9-3-1;
Optical Metro 3500
CMMT-ROLL-STS12C
The Commit Rollover STS-12c command is used to delete the original STS-12c path. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CMMT-ROLL-STS12C:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=DOMAIN,RTO=DOMAIN[,CMMTSWMATE=Domain]; Table 2-78 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO CMMTSWMATE Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints Second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled (see Note) AID RFROM is to be rolled to (see Note) Deletes the original switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit
Note: When rolling a switch mate, RFROM=OLDSWMATE, RTO=NEWSWMATE
2-74 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-79 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37 Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37, ... 181 Identify the STS-12c facility on the WAN port of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 sts# = 1 Note: The WAN AID only applies to the fromAID and toAID fields. The WAN AID does not apply to RFROM and RTO.
STS12C OC12-slot#-port#-sts# facility AID
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
WAN-slot#-port#-sts#
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-75 Table 2-80 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values Description 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR CMMTSWMATE Y N (default) Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate.
Example input
Rollover an STS-12c working connection on the OC-12 circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between an OC-12 service and the OC-12 circuit pack. Bridge the original OC-12 working connection:
ENT-ROLL-STS12C:OTTAWA:OC12-9-1-1,OC12-8-1-1:CTAG3::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC12-9-1-1,RTO=OC12-7-1-1,VALID=Y;

ED-ROLL-STS12C:OTTAWA:OC12-9-1,OC12-8-1:CTAG3::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC12-9-1-1,RTO=OC12-7-1-1,VALID=Y:SWITCHED;

CMMT-ROLL-STS12C:OTTAWA:OC12-9-1-1,OC12-8-1-1:CTAG3::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC12-9-1-1,RTO=OC12-7-1-1;
CMMT-ROLL-STS24C
CMMT-ROLL-STS24C:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=DOMAIN,RTO=DOMAIN[,CMMTSWMATE=Domain]; Table 2-81 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints Second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled (see Note) AID RFROM is to be rolled to (see Note)
CMMTSWMATE Deletes the original switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit Note: When rolling a switch mate, RFROM=OLDSWMATE, RTO=NEWSWMATE
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-77 Table 2-82 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-24c facility on an OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 25 Identify the STS-24c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 25, 49, ... 169 Identify the STS-24c facility on the WAN port of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 sts# = 1 Note: The WAN AID only applies to the fromAID and toAID fields. The WAN AID does not apply to RFROM and RTO. Table 2-83 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values Description 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR CMMTSWMATE Y N (default) Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate.
STS24C OC48-slot#-sts# facility AID
OC192-slot#-sts#
Rollover an STS-24c working connection on the OC-48 STS circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between an OC-48 STS circuit pack and another OC-48 STS circuit pack. Bridge the original OC-48 working connection:
ENT-ROLL-STS24C:OTTAWA:OC48-9-1,OC48-8-1:CTAG3::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC48-9-1,RTO=OC48-7-1,VALID=Y;

ED-ROLL-STS24C:OTTAWA:OC48-9-1,OC48-8-1:CTAG3::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC48-9-1,RTO=OC48-7-1,VALID=Y:SWITCHED;

CMMT-ROLL-STS24C:OTTAWA:OC48-9-1,OC48-8-1:CTAG3::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC48-9-1,RTO=OC48-7-1;
Optical Metro 3500
CMMT-ROLL-STS3C
CMMT-ROLL-STS3C:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=Domain,RTO=Domain[,CMMTSWMATE=Domain]; Table 2-84 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO CMMTSWMATE Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints Second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled (see Note) AID RFROM is to be rolled to (see Note) Deletes the original switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit
Note: When rolling a switch mate, RFROM=OLDSWMATE, RTO=NEWSWMATE
2-80 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-85 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR CMMTSWMATE Y N (default) Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate.
Example input
Rollover an STS-3c working connection on the OC-3x4 circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between an OC-3 service and the OC-3x4 circuit pack. Bridge the original OC-3 working connection:
ENT-ROLL-STS3C:OTTAWA:OC3-9-1-1,OC3-8-1-1:D::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-1-1,RTO=OC3-7-1-1,VALID=Y;

ED-ROLL-STS3C:OTTAWA:OC3-9-1-1,OC3-8-1-1:B::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-1-1,RTO=OC3-7-1-1,VALID=Y:SWITCHED;

CMMT-ROLL-STS3C:OTTAWA:OC3-9-1-1,OC3-8-1-1:C::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-1-1,RTO=OC3-7-1-1;
Optical Metro 3500
CMMT-ROLL-STS48C
CMMT-ROLL-STS48C:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=DOMAIN,RTO=DOMAIN[,CMMTSWMATE=Domain]; Table 2-86 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints Second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled (see Note) AID RFROM is to be rolled to (see Note)
CMMTSWMATE Deletes the original switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit Note: When rolling a switch mate, RFROM=OLDSWMATE, RTO=NEWSWMATE Table 2-87 AID descriptions AID type STS48C facility AID Command-specific values OC48-slot#-sts# Purpose slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 on OC-48 STS sts# = 1 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 49, 97... 145
OC192-slot#-sts#
2-82 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-88 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values Description 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR CMMTSWMATE Y N (default) Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate.
Example input
Rollover an STS-48c working connection on the OC-48 STS circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between an OC-48 STS circuit pack and another OC-48 STS circuit pack. Bridge the original OC-48 working connection:
ENT-ROLL-STS48C:OTTAWA:OC48-9-1,OC48-8-1:CTAG3::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC48-9-1,RTO=OC48-7-1,VALID=Y;

ED-ROLL-STS48C:OTTAWA:OC48-9-1,OC48-8-1:CTAG3::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC48-9-1,RTO=OC48-7-1,VALID=Y:SWITCHED;

CMMT-ROLL-STS48C:OTTAWA:OC48-9-1,OC48-8-1:CTAG3::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC48-9-1,RTO=OC48-7-1;
Optical Metro 3500
CMMT-ROLL-VT1
The Commit Rollover VT1 command is used to delete the original VT1.5 path. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CMMT-ROLL-VT1:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=Domain,RTO=Domain[,CMMTSWMATE=Domain]; Table 2-89 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO CMMTSWMATE Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints Second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled (see Note) AID RFROM is to be rolled to (see Note) Deletes the original switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit
Note: When rolling a switch mate, RFROM=OLDSWMATE, RTO=NEWSWMATE. Table 2-90 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose slot# = 4 to 10 port# = 1 to 12 grp = 1 to 3 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28 DS1 service module port# = 1 to 84 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4
VT1.5 DS1-slot#-port# facility AID DS1-DFLT-grp DS1-slot#-port#-t1# DS1-slot#-port#-ALL DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-Hline-hslot#hport#
2-84 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-90 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose DS1 service module grp# = 1 to 3 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 sts# = 1 to 12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 48 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port# = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 for sts# = 1 or 2 vtg# = 1 or 2 for sts# = 3 vt# = 1 to 4
VT1.5 DS1-DFLT-grp#-%HLINK-Hlinefacility AID hslot#-hport#
OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt# OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL
OC48-slot#-sts#-vtg#-vt# OC48-slot#-sts#-ALL
EC1-slot#-port#-vtg#-vt# EC1-slot#-port#-ALL
WAN-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt# WAN-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-ALL WAN-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-85 Table 2-91 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values Description 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR CMMTSWMATE Y N (default) Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate.
Example input
Rollover a VT1.5 working connection on the OC-3x4 circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between a DS1 service and the OC-3x4 circuit pack. Bridge the original OC-3 connection:
ENT-ROLL-VT1:OTTAWA:OC3-9-2-1-7-1,DS1-4-4:A::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-2-1-7-1,RTO=OC3-9-3-1-7-1,VALID=Y;

ED-ROLL-VT1:OTTAWA:OC3-9-2-1-7-1,DS1-4-4:B::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-2-1-7-1,RTO=OC3-9-3-1-7-1,VALID=Y:SWITCHED;
Remove the original connection:

CMMT-ROLL-VT1:OTTAWA:OC3-9-2-1-7-1,DS1-4-4:C::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-2-1-7-1,RTO=OC3-9-3-1-7-1;
CMMT-TL1SCRPT-NE
The Commit TL1 Script Network Element command is used to apply the TL1 commands contained in the TL1 script file (stored on the NP) to a designated network element. This command is not successful if one of the following occurs: any command in the TL1 script file does not complete successfully a timeout period elapses before an event or alarm is generated, indicating that the save command is completed If this command is not successful, a TL1 Script file Load Failed alarm becomes active. To clear this alarm (and cancel this operation), you must run the CANC-TL1SCRPT-NE command. Security level Level 4 Input syntax
CMMT-TL1SCRPT-NE:[TID]::CTAG; Table 2-92 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag
Commit the TL1 commands in the TL1 script file to network element OTTAWA:
CMMT-TL1SCRPT-NE:OTTAWA::CTAG93;
Optical Metro 3500
CMMT-UPGRD
The Commit Upgrade command causes the new loads on the shelf processor, the card, or the network processor to become the permanent load. You cannot cancel the upgrade once the commit upgrade command has been executed. Security level Level 3 Input syntax for NP
CMMT-UPGRD:[TID]::CTAG;
Input syntax for SP

CMMT-UPGRD:[TID]:[AID]:CTAG; Table 2-93 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier Slot number of the card to upgrade (to be used for slot upgrade only). Correlation tag
Commit the upgrade load on network element OTTAWA:

CMMT-UPGRD:OTTAWA::CTAG24;
Commit the upgrade load on OC3NP:

CMMT-UPGRD:OC3NP::CTAG25;
Commit the upgrade load on slot 3 of network element OTTAWA:

CMMT-UPGRD:OTTAWA:3:CTAG26;
CONN-TACC-STS1
The Connect Test Access Cross-Connect command is used to provision a test access session for a STS-1 facility. Note: For a listing of supported cross-connect types for monitor test access sessions, see Table 2-94.
Table 2-94 Supported test access cross-connect types (monitor mode) Cross-connect type 1WAY (Unidirectional) 2WAY (Bidirectional) 1WAYPR (Unidirectional Path Ring) 2WAYPR (Bidirectional Path Ring) MONE (FromAid) Yes Yes Yes Yes MONF (ToAid) No Yes No No No No MONEF (FromAid & ToAid) No Yes No No No No
2WAYBR (Bidirectional Bridge Ring) Yes FFP (Facility Protection Group) Yes
Security level Level 3 Input syntax

CONN-TACC-STS1:[TID]:FromAID:CTAG::TAPAID:MODE[::LASSO]; Table 2-95 Syntax definition Field TID FromAID CTAG TAPAID MODE LASSO Purpose Target identifier From access identifier. The facility at one end of the cross-connect. The FromAID specifies the signal source. Correlation tag Test access port access identifier. STS-1 to act on. Mode of test access session Link association
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-89 Table 2-96 AID descriptions AID type FromAID Possible values DS3-slot#-port# Description slot# = 3, 5, 7, or 9 port# = 1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3/EC-1x12 slot# = 3, 5, 7, or 9 port# = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port# = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 to 12 slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1 to 48 slot# = 11 or 12 sts# = 1 to 192
DS3-slot#-port#-%HLINKHline-Hslot-Hport
EC1-slot#-port#
OC48-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-sts#
2-90 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-96 AID descriptions AID type TAPAID Possible values EC1-slot#-port# Description slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port# = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 slot# = 3, 5, 7, or 9 port# = 1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3/EC-1x12 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 to 12 slot# = 3 to 10 sts# = 1 to 48
DS3-slot#-port#
OC48-slot#-sts#
Table 2-97 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values MODE MONE MONF MONEF Description Monitor receive path at from end. Creates a single facility access digroup (FAD) test access session. Monitor receive path at to end. Creates a single facility access digroup (FAD) test access session. Monitor receive path at both from and to ends. Creates a dual facility access digroup (FAD) test access session.
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-91 Table 2-97 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values LASSO Y Description Y for yes Drops the test access connections when the link is dropped. N (default) N for no Test access connections are maintained when the link is dropped. Note: The LASSO parameter only applies when using a Hekimian test set for the test access session. If you are not using a Hekimian test set, the test access session is always maintained when the link is dropped, even if the LASSO parameter is enabled. Example input
Provision a monitor test access session on the receive path at the from end or originating point of the path on a STS-1 facility. In this example the test access connection will be dropped if a loss of association occurs.
CONN-TACC-STS1:MYTOWN:OC3-3-1-1:MYTAG::DS3-3-1:MONE::Y;
CONN-TACC-STS12C
The Connect Test Access Cross-Connect command is used to provision a test access session for a STS-12c facility. Note: For a listing of supported cross-connect types for monitor test access sessions, see Table 2-94 on page 2-88. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CONN-TACC-STS12C:[TID]:FromAID:CTAG::TAPAID:MODE[::LASSO]; Table 2-98 Syntax definition Field TID FromAID CTAG TAPAID MODE LASSO Purpose Target identifier From access identifier. The facility at one end of the cross-connect. The FromAID specifies the signal source. Correlation tag Test access port access identifier. STS-12c to act on. Mode of test access session Link association
Table 2-99 AID descriptions AID type FromAID Possible values Description
OC12-slot#-port#-sts# slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12, 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 OC48-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-sts# slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1,13, 25, 37 slot# = 11 or 12 sts# = 1,13, 25, ... 181
TAPAID
OC12-slot#-port#-sts# slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-12, 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 OC48-slot#-sts# slot# = 3 to 10 sts# = 1,13, 25, 37
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-93 Table 2-100 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values MODE MONE MONF MONEF Description Monitor receive path at from end. Creates a single facility access digroup (FAD) test access session. Monitor receive path at to end. Creates a single facility access digroup (FAD) test access session. Monitor receive path at both from and to ends. Creates a dual facility access digroup (FAD) test access session. Y for yes Drops the test access connections when the link is dropped. N (default) N for no Test access connections are maintained when the link is dropped. Note: The LASSO parameter only applies when using a Hekimian test set for the test access session. If you are not using a Hekimian test set, the test access session is always maintained when the link is dropped, even if the LASSO parameter is enabled. Example input
LASSO
Provision a monitor test access session on the receive path at the from end or originating point of the path on a STS-12c facility. In this example the test access connection will be dropped if a loss of association occurs.
CONN-TACC-STS12C:MYTOWN:OC12-3-1-1:MYTAG::OC12-3-1-1:MONE::Y;
CONN-TACC-STS24C
Table 2-102 AID descriptions AID type FromAID Possible values OC48-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-sts# TAPAID OC48-slot#-sts# Description slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1, 25 slot# = 11 or 12 sts# = 1, 25, 49, ...169 slot# = 3 to 10 sts# = 1, 25
Optical Metro 3500
LASSO
CONN-TACC-STS24C:MYTOWN:OC48-3-1:MYTAG::OC48-3-1:MONE::Y;
CONN-TACC-STS3C
Table 2-105 AID descriptions AID type FromAID Possible values OC3-slot#-port#-sts# Description slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 to 12 slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1,4,7, ... 46 slot# = 11 or 12 sts# = 1,4,7, ... 190
OC48-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-sts#
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-97 Table 2-105 AID descriptions AID type TAPAID Possible values OC3-slot#-port#-sts# Description slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 sts# = 1,4,7,10 slot# = 3 to 10 sts# = 1,4,7, ... 46
OC48-slot#-sts#
Table 2-106 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values MODE MONE MONF MONEF Description Monitor receive path at from end. Creates a single facility access digroup (FAD) test access session. Monitor receive path at to end. Creates a single facility access digroup (FAD) test access session. Monitor receive path at both from and to ends. Creates a dual facility access digroup (FAD) test access session. Y for yes Drops the test access connections when the link is dropped. N (default) N for no Test access connections are maintained when the link is dropped. Note: The LASSO parameter only applies when using a Hekimian test set for the test access session. If you are not using a Hekimian test set, the test access session is always maintained when the link is dropped, even if the LASSO parameter is enabled. Example input
LASSO
CONN-TACC-STS1:MYTOWN:OC3-3-1-1:MYTAG::OC3-3-1-1:MONE::Y;
CONN-TACC-STS48C
Table 2-108 AID descriptions AID type FromAID Possible values OC48-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-sts# TAPAID OC48-slot#-sts# Description slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1 slot# = 11 or 12 sts# = 1, 49, 97, 145 slot# = 3 to 10 sts# = 1
Optical Metro 3500
LASSO
CONN-TACC-STS48C:MYTOWN:OC48-3-1:MYTAG::OC48-3-1:MONE::Y;
CONN-TACC-T1
The Connect Test Access Cross-Connect command is used to provision a test access session for a DS1 facility on a DS1, DS3/VT, or DSM circuit pack. Note: For a listing of supported cross-connect types for monitor test access sessions, see Table 2-94 on page 2-88. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CONN-TACC-T1:[TID]:FromAID:CTAG::TAPAID:MODE[::LASSO]; Table 2-110 Syntax definition Field TID FromAID CTAG TAPAID MODE LASSO Purpose Target identifier From access identifier. The facility at one end of the cross-connect. The FromAID specifies the signal source. Correlation tag Test access port access identifier. DS1 to act on. Mode of test access session Link association
Table 2-111 AID descriptions AID type FromAID Possible values DS1-slot#-port# DS1-slot#-port#-t1# Description slot# = 4 to 10, port# =1 to 12 slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28
DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-Hline port# = 1 to 84, hslot# = 3 to 10 -hslot#-hport# hport# = 1 to 4 Hline= OC3 or Oc12
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-101 Table 2-111 (continued) AID descriptions AID type TAPAID Possible values DS1-slot#-port# EC1-slot#-port#-vtg#-vt# Description slot# = 4 to 10, port# =1 to 12 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port# = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts#= 1 to 3, vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 sts#= 1 to 12, vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4
Table 2-112 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values MODE MONE MONF MONEF LASSO Y Description Monitor receive path at from end. Creates a single facility access digroup (FAD) test access session. Monitor receive path at to end. Creates a single facility access digroup (FAD) test access session. Monitor receive path at both from and to ends. Creates a dual facility access digroup (FAD) test access session. Y for yes. Drops the test access connections when the link is dropped.
N (default) N for no. Test access connections are maintained when the link is dropped. Note: The LASSO parameter only applies when using a Hekimian test set for the test access session. If you are not using a Hekimian test set, the test access session is always maintained when the link is dropped, even if the LASSO parameter is enabled. Example input
Provision a monitor test access session on the receive path at the from end or originating point of the path on a DS1 facility. In this example the test access connection is maintained if a loss of association occurs.
CONN-TACC-T1:MYTOWN:DS1-4-1:MYTAG::DS1-5-1:MONE::N;
CONN-TACC-T3
The Connect Test Access Cross-Connect command is used to provision a test access session for a DS3 facility. Note: For a listing of supported cross-connect types for monitor test access sessions, see Table 2-94 on page 2-88. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CONN-TACC-T3:[TID]:FromAID:CTAG::TAPAID:MODE[::LASSO]; Table 2-113 Syntax definition Field TID FromAID CTAG TAPAID MODE LASSO Purpose Target identifier From access identifier. The facility at one end of the cross-connect. The FromAID specifies the signal source. Correlation tag Test access port access identifier. DS3 to act on. Mode of test access session Link association
Table 2-114 AID description AID type FromAID Possible values DS3-slot#-port# Description slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port # = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port # = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 slot = 3 or 5; port = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to10 Hport = 1 to 4
DS3-slot-port-%HLINKMS DSM DS3 Facility Hline-Hslot-Hport AID
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-103 Table 2-114 (continued) AID description AID type TAPAID Possible values EC1-slot#-port# Description slot# = 3 to 10 port # = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port # = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port # = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port # = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 slot = 3 or 5; port = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to10 Hport = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 sts# = 1 to 12 slot# = 3 to 10 sts# = 1 to 48
DS3-slot#-port#
DS3-slot-port-%HLINKHline-Hslot-Hport
OC48-slot#-sts#
2-104 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-115 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values LASSO Y Description Y for yes Drops the test access connections when the link is dropped. N (default) N for no Test access connections are maintained when the link is dropped. Note: The LASSO parameter only applies when using a Hekimian test set for the test access session. If you are not using a Hekimian test set, the test access session is always maintained when the link is dropped, even if the LASSO parameter is enabled. Example input
Provision a monitor test access session on the receive path at the from end or originating point of the path on a DS3 facility. In this example the test access connection is maintained if a loss of association occurs.
CONN-TACC-T3:MYTOWN:DS3-9-3:MYTAG::DS3-9-12:MONE::N;
Optical Metro 3500
CONN-TACC-VT1
The Connect Test Access Cross-Connect command is used to provision a test access session for a VT1.5 facility on a DS1, DS3/VT, DSM, OC-n, or EC-1xn circuit pack. Note: For a listing of supported cross-connect types for monitor test access sessions, see Table 2-94 on page 2-88. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
CONN-TACC-VT1:[TID]:FromAID:CTAG::TAPAID:MODE[::LASSO]; Table 2-116 Syntax definition Field TID FromAID CTAG TAPAID MODE LASSO Purpose Target identifier From access identifier. The facility at one end of the cross-connect. The FromAID specifies the signal source. Correlation tag Test access port access identifier. VT1.5 to act on. Mode of test access session Link association
Table 2-117 AID description AID type FromAID Possible values DS1-slot#-port# EC1-slot#-port#-vtg#-vt# Description slot# = 4 to 10, port# =1 to 12 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port # = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port # = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3, vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 12, port# = 1 sts# = 1 to 12, vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4
OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt#
OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt#
2-106 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-117 AID description AID type MS DSM DS3 Facility AID TAPAID Possible values DS3-slot-port-%HLINKHline-Hslot-Hport Description slot = 3 or 5; port = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to10 Hport = 1 to 4 slot# = 4 to 10, port# =1 to 12 slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28
DS1-slot#-port# DS1-slot#-port#-t1#
DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-OC3-hslot# port# = 1 to 84, hslot# = 3 to 10 -hport# hport# = 1 to 4 DS3-slot#-port#-%HLINKHline-Hslot#-Hport# slot = 3 or 5; port = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to10 Hport = 1 to 4 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port # = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port # = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts#= 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 sts#= 1 to 12 vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4
EC1-slot#-port#-vtg#-vt#
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-107 Table 2-118 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values LASSO Y Description Y for yes Drops the test access connections when the link is dropped. N (default) N for no Test access connections are maintained when the link is dropped. Note: The LASSO parameter only applies when using a Hekimian test set for the test access session. If you are not using a Hekimian test set, the test access session is always maintained when the link is dropped, even if the LASSO parameter is enabled. Example input
Provision a VT1.5 monitor test access session on the receive path at the from end or originating point of the path. In this example the test access connection is dropped if a loss of association occurs.
CONN-TACC-VT1:MYTOWN:OC3-7-1-1-1-1:MYTAG::DS1-4-1:MONE::Y;
CONN-TSTSIG-T1
The Connect Test Signal T1 command instructs the network element to connect a test signal to the DS1 facility or monitor a connected signal. To retrieve error count on the monitored signal, use the RTRV-T1 command. Internal test equipment connected with the CONN-TSTSIG-T1 remains connected until it is released using the DISC-TSTSIG-T1 command (see page 2-118). Before internal test equipment can be connected to a DS1 facility, the facility must be put in an out-of-service state (RMV-T1 command). In order to clear the error count on the internal signal monitor, disconnect the internal test equipment by using the DISC-TSTSIG-T1 command. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
CONN-TSTSIG-T1:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[SRC],[DIRN],[TSIG],[ERR]; Table 2-119 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SRC, DIRN, TSIG, ERR Table 2-120 AID descriptions AID type DS1 DS1 DSM Command-specific values DS1-slot#-port# DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-OC3Hslot#-Hport# Purpose Identify the DS1 facility where slot# = 4 to 10, port# = 1 to 12 Identify the DS1 facility where port#=1 to 84, Hslot# = 3 to 10, Hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the DS1 facility on the MS DSM where port# = 1 to 84 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot# = 3 to 10, Hport# = 1 to 4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to act on. Correlation tag See the Parameter descriptions table for details
MS DSM DS1 DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-Hlinefacility Hslot#-Hport#
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-109 Table 2-121 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values SRC SRC MON DIRN IN Description Connect the internal signal generator to the facility (default) Connect the internal signal monitor to the facility Default. Internal signal generator outputs a test signal in the direction of the optics. Internal signal monitor monitors the signal from the copper (DS1) side of the facility. Internal signal generator outputs a test signal to the copper (DS1) side of the facility. Internal signal monitor monitors the signal from the direction of the optics. The test signal to be sent for or monitored (see notes): PR2017 PR2003 PR1514 PR2318 FIX QRSS <number> a pseudo-random pattern: x20 + x17 + 1 (default) a pseudo-random pattern: x20 + x3 + 1 a pseudo-random pattern: x15 + x14 + 1 a pseudo-random pattern: x23 + x18 + 1 the fixed Daly pattern a pseudo-random pattern, x20 + x17 + 1, with zero suppression a fixed pattern made by endlessly repeating the binary version of the number specified by the user. For DS1 facilities on the MS DSM, the supported range is between 0 and 512. For all other DS1 facilities, the supported range is between 0 and 16,777,215 The number of errors to be inserted in one second (default is 0). Valid only if the SRC parameter is set to SRC.
OUT
TSIG
ERR
0 to 1023
Note 1: The PR2003 pattern is not the pattern usually referred to as PR2003 in North American DS1 test sets. It is a rare variant that has been included for completeness. To generate a PR2003 pattern compatible with a North American test set, the PR2017 pattern should be used without zero suppression enabled. Note 2: DS1 facilities on the MS DSM do not support the PR2003 and FIX pattern. Note 3: DS1 facilities on the DSM do not support the QRSS pattern. QRSS is only supported by DS1 facilities on the MS DSM. Note 4: Test set patterns 2e15-1, 2e20-1, and 2e23-1 correspond to a repeating fixed pattern on the Optical Metro 3000. Test set pattern PRBS corresponds to one of the PR2017, PR1514, PR2003, or PR2318 patterns on the Optical Metro 3000. Test set pattern 3:24 does not have an equivalent Optical Metro 3000 pattern. Note 5: Monitoring of a DS1 facility on the MS DSM will not work properly if the frame format of the facility is set to superframe with TR08 extensions (SF-TR08).
At the SEATTLE network element, attach an internal DS1 signal generator to DS1 facility 7 on the slot 4 DS1 mapper. Send the test signal with a pattern of x20 + x17 + 1 and with 10 errors onto the DS1 copper:
CONN-TSTSIG-T1:SEATTLE:DS1-4-7:CTAG12::SRC,OUT,,10;
Monitor the returned pattern:

CONN-TSTSIG-T1:SEATTLE:DS1-4-7:CTAG12::MON,IN,,10;
Optical Metro 3500
CONN-TSTSIG-T3
The Connect Test Signal T3 command instructs the network element to connect a test signal to the DS3 facility or monitor a connected signal. To retrieve error count on the monitored signal, use the RTRV-T3 command. Internal test equipment connected with the CONN-TSTSIG -T3 remains connected until it is released using the DISC-TSTSIG-T1 command (see page 2-118). Before internal test equipment can be connected to a DS3 facility, the facility must be put in an out-of-service state (RMV-T3 command). In order to clear the error count on the internal signal monitor, disconnect the internal test equipment by using the DISC-TSTSIG -T3 command. For the Multiservice Distributed Service Module (MS DSM), DS3 cross-connects must be present to connect a test signal to a DS3 facility. In addition, you must disconnect the DS3 test signal before you can delete DS3 cross-connects. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
CONN-TSTSIG-T3:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[SRC],[DIRN],[TSIG]; Table 2-122 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SRC, DIRN, TSIG Table 2-123 AID descriptions AID type MS DSM Command-specific values DS3-slot#-port#-%HLINKHline-Hslot#-Hport# Purpose Identify the DS3 facility on the MS DSM where slot# = 3 or 5; port# = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot# = 3 to10, Hport# = 1 to 4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to act on. Correlation tag See the Parameter descriptions table for details
2-112 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-124 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values SRC SRC MON DIRN IN Description Connect the internal signal generator to the facility (default) Connect the internal signal monitor to the facility Default. Internal signal generator outputs a test signal in the direction of the optics. Internal signal monitor monitors the signal from the copper (DS3) side of the facility. Internal signal generator outputs a test signal to the copper (DS3) side of the facility. Internal signal monitor monitors the signal from the direction of the optics. The test signal to be sent for or monitored: PR15UFRNER PR15FRNER PR15UFRER PR15FRER ALL1S IDLE PR20UFR PR23UFR QRSSUFR a pseudo-random pattern, 2E+15-1, unframed, unerrored (default) a pseudo-random pattern, 2E+15-1, framed, unerrored a pseudo-random pattern, 2E+15-1, unframed, errored a pseudo-random pattern, 2E+15-1, framed errored All 1's pattern (only available in SRC mode) DS3 framed idle (repeating 1100 pattern) a pseudo-random pattern, 2E+20-1, unframed, unerrored a pseudo-random pattern, 2E+23-1, unframed, unerrored a pseudo-random pattern, x20 + x17 + 1, with zero-suppression, unframed Note: DS3 facilities on the MS DSM support unframed patterns only.
OUT
TSIG
Optical Metro 3500
At the SEATTLE network element, attach an internal DS3 signal generator to DS3 facility 5-2 of the MS DSM connected to OC12-3-1 host port. Send the test signal with a pattern of x20 + x17 + 1:
CONN-TSTSIG-T3:SEATTLE:DS3-5-2-%HLINK-OC12-3-1:CTAG12::SRC, OUT,QRSSUFR;
Monitor the returned pattern:

CONN-TSTSIG-T3:SEATTLE:DS3-5-2-%HLINK-OC12-3-1:CTAG12::MON,IN, QRSSUFR;
DEFRAG-EQPT
The Defragment Equipment command achieves internal bandwidth or physical defragmentation. Bandwidth defragmentation is achieved by sequentially deleting then reprovisioning cross-connects, rearranging the internal backplane bandwidth. Physical defragmentation is achieved by re-ordering the spread of bandwidth or component allocations to make room for new cross-connects. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DEFRAG-EQPT:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MODE][,FOR_DS1_GROUP]; Table 2-125 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MODE FOR_DS1_GROUP Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. Equipment to act on. Correlation tag Defragmentation mode. Omit this parameter to achieve bandwidth defragmentation. Group number for DS1 physical defragmentations
Table 2-126 AID descriptions AID type 100FOST MS DSM AID Command-specific values 100FOST-slot# AGGOC3-1-%HLINK-OC3hslot#-hport# AGGOC3OC12-1%HLINK-HLINE-hslot#-hport# Purpose Identify the 8x100BT-P2P where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the MS DSM aggregate circuit pack where slot# = 1 or 2 HLINE=OC3 or OC12 hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-115 Table 2-127 Parameter descriptions Parameter MODE Possible values CONSOLIDATE Description Re-order the spread of VT1.5 and STS-1 bandwidth allocations to make room for new WAN, VT1.5, STS-1 or STS-3c cross-connects. Re-order component allocation for DS3 cross-connects to make room for DS1 cross-connects. Use the FOR_DS1_GROUP parameter to select the DS1 group or groups.
FREE_DS1_RSRC
FREE_STS3c_WAN_RSRC Re-order component allocation for STS-1 cross-connects to make room for STS-3c cross-connects. FOR_DS1_GROUP 1 to 3 Select the DS1 group(s), for DS1 physical defragmentations: 1 = ports 1 to 28 2 = ports 29 to 56 3 = ports 57 to 84 Grouping is allowed.
DISC-TACC
The Disconnect Test Access Cross-Connect command is used to remove individual test access sessions. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DISC-TACC:[TID]:TAPAID:CTAG; Table 2-128 Syntax definition Field TID TAPAID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Test access port access identifier. Correlation tag
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-117 Table 2-129 AID description AID type TAPAID Possible values DS1-slot#-port# DS1-slot#-port#-t1# Description slot# =4 to 10, port# =1 to 12 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9, port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28
DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-HLINE port# = 1 to 84, hslot# = 3 to 10 -hslot#-hport# hport# = 1 to 4; Hline= OC3 or OC12 DS3-slot#-port# slot# = 3, 5, 7, or 9 port# = 1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3/EC-1x12 slot = 3 or 5; port = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to10, Hport = 1 to 4 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port# = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12, vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port# = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3, 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts#= 1 to 3, vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-12, 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 sts# = 1 to 12 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 sts#= 1 to 12, vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10, sts# = 1 to 48
DS3-slot-port-%HLINKHline-Hslot-Hport EC1-slot#-port#-vtg#-vt#
EC1-slot#-port#
OC3-slot#-port#-sts#vtg#-vt# OC12-slot#-port#-sts#
OC12-slot#-port#-sts#vtg#-vt# OC48-slot#-sts# Example input
Disconnect the path from a test access session.

DISC-TACC:MYTOWN:DS1-4-1:MYTAG;
DISC-TSTSIG-T1
The Disconnect Test Signal T1 command instructs the network element to disconnect the DS1 test signal from the facility or stop monitoring a connected DS1 signal. All internal test equipment connected to a facility is disconnected. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
DISC-TSTSIG-T1:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-130 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 2-131 AID descriptions AID type DS1 Command-specific values DS1-slot#-port# Purpose Identify the DS1 facility where slot# =4 to 10 port# =1 to 12 Identify the DS1 facility where port#=1 to 84, Hslot# = 3 to 10, Hport# = 1 to 4 port = 1 to 84 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to act on. Correlation tag
DS1 DSM
DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-OC3Hslot#-Hport# DS1-1-port-%HLINK-HlineHslot-Hport
MS DSM DS1 facility
Example input
Remove all internal test equipment on DS1 facility 7 on the DS1 in slot 4:
DISC-TSTSIG-T1:SEATTLE:DS1-4-7:CTAG12;
Optical Metro 3500
DISC-TSTSIG-T3
The Disconnect Test Signal T3 command instructs the network element to disconnect the DS3 test signal from the facility or stop monitoring a connected DS3 signal. All internal test equipment connected to a facility is disconnected. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
DISC-TSTSIG-T1:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-132 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 2-133 AID descriptions AID type MS DSM DS3 Facility AID Command-specific values DS3-slot-port-%HLINK-HlineHslot-Hport Purpose Identify the DS3 facility where slot = 3 or 5; port = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to10 Hport = 1 to 4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to act on. Correlation tag
Example input
Remove all internal test equipment on DS3 facility 5-2 of the MS DSM connected to OC12-3-1 host port:
DISC-TSTSIG-T3:SEATTLE:DS3-5-2-%HLINK-OC12-3-1:CTAG12;
DLT-ALM-PROFILE
The Delete Alarm Profile command allows the user to delete an alarm profile. Security Level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-ALM-PROFILE:[TID]::CTAG::AIDTYPE,PRFLNAME; Table 2-134 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG AIDTYPE PRFLNAME Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Access identifier TYPE Alarm profile name assigned by user
Table 2-135 Parameter descriptions Parameter AIDTYPE Possible values VT1 STS1 STS3C STS12C STS24C STS48C EQPT E1 T1 T3 EC1 OC3 OC12 Description VT1 facility STS-1 facility STS-3C facility STS-12C facility STS-24C facility STS-48C facility equipment E1 facility T1 facility T3 facility EC-1 facility OC-3 facility OC-12 facility
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-121 Table 2-135 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter AIDTYPE Possible values OC48 OC192 FAC COM DSM SECU ETH WAN FC PRFLNAME ASCII string Description OC-48 facility OC-192 facility conditions attributed to ILAN facilities conditions attributed to shelf or SP DS1 or DS3 service module facility Security related Ethernet facility WAN facility Fibre Channel Alarm profile name assigned by user Alarm profile name-can be up to 20 characters long and must be enclosed within quotation marks (quotation marks and backslash to be excluded from name). Example input
Delete the alarm profile for network element OTTAWA:

DLT-ALM-PROFILE:OTTAWA::CTAG12::OC3,ALARMSON;
DLT-BANNER
The Delete Banner command is used to delete the current login banner warning text and restore the default login banner warning text for a network element or NP. The login banner warning text is displayed when you log in to a TL1 session on a network element or NP. Security level Level 4 Input syntax
DLT-BANNER:[TID]::CTAG; Table 2-136 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag
Delete the login banner warning text for network element OTTAWA:
DLT-BANNER:OTTAWA::CTAG93;
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-BLSRRING
Use the Delete BLSR Ring command to delete a BLSR ring and its associated map. This command is supported on the network processor. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-BLSRRING:[TID]:AID:CTAG:::[DELETE=DOMAIN]; Table 2-137 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG DELETE Purpose Target identifier Ring name Correlation tag Delete status
Table 2-138 AID descriptions AID type Ring name Command-specific values Purpose
Table 2-139 Parameter descriptions Parameter DELETE Possible values Y N (default) Example input Description Delete ring and all nodes on ring Only delete ring with no nodes
Delete the BLSR ring and its ring map for NPFGXOTT:
DLT-BLSRRING:NPFGXOTT:RING1:CTAG:::DELETE=Y;
DLT-CRS-STS1
The Delete Cross-connect STS1 command is used to delete an STS-1 cross-connect between two STS-1 facilities. Note 1: Bandwidth assigned to a Resilient Packet Ring (RPR) cannot be removed until all Packet Edge circuit packs have been detached from the RPR. Note 2: For DS3 facilities on the MS DSM, you cannot delete DS3 cross-connects if a test signal is connected to the facility. You must first disconnect the test signal. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-CRS-STS1:[TID]:FromAID,ToAID:CTAG::[CCT]:[SWMATE=Domain]; Table 2-140 Syntax definition Field TID FromAID Purpose Target identifier From access identifier. The facility at one end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the FromAID specifies the signal source. To access identifier. The facility at the other end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the ToAID specifies the signal destination. Correlation tag Cross-connection type Path protection Switch Mate. Path protection for the FromAID OC-3, OC-3x4, OC-12, OC-12x4, OC-48, OC-48 STS, or OC-192 interface only when the CCT is protected. That is, when the CCT is one of 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR.
ToAID
CTAG CCT SWMATE
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-125 Table 2-141 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values STS-1 Facility AID OC3-slot#-port#-sts# Purpose Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-3 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 to 12 Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1 to 48 Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 192 Identify the STS-1 facility on an EC-1 circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port # = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port # = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 Identify the STS-1 facility on a DS3 circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, or 9 port# = 1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3/EC-1x12
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
EC1-slot#-port#
DS3-slot#-port#
2-126 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-141 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values STS-1 Facility AID WAN-slot#-port#-sts# Purpose Identify the STS-1 facility on the WAN port where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 for 2x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 3 for 4x100FX-P2Por 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 21 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P
DS3-slot-port-%HLINK- slot = 3 or 5 STS1 Hline-Hslot-Hport port = 1 to 6 facility Hline = OC3 or OC12 AID on Hslot = 3 to 10 MS DSM Hport = 1 to 4 WAN-slot-port-sts%HLINK-Hline-HslotHport STSMDS1-grp%HLINK-Hline-HslotHport slot = 3 to 6; port = 1 to 8; sts = 1 to 3 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4 grp = 1 to 3 grp 1 =DS1s 1 to 28 grp 2 = DS1s 29 to 56 grp 3 = DS1s 57 to 84 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4 Identify the RPR where index# = 1 to 8
RPR AID
IPTR-index#
IPTR-index#-port#-sts# Identify the RPR, for RPRs that have virtual concatenation enabled, where index# = 1 to 8 port# = 1 or 2 sts# = 1 to 24
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-127 Table 2-142 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR IPTRING SWMATE OC3-slot#-port#-sts# Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection (default) Unidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional bridge ring connection SONET bandwith allocation for RPR Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-3 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3, 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3
OC12-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-12 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12, 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 sts# = 1 to 12 OC48-slot#-sts# Identify the STS-1 facility where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1 to 48 Identify the STS-1 facility where slot# = 11, 12, sts# = 1 to 192
OC192-slot#-sts#
AID, CCT, and SWMATE usage Figure 4-1 on page 4-122 shows valid combinations of AID, CCT, and SWMATE along with the resulting facility connections.
Example input
For the NEWYORK network element, delete the bidirectional STS-1 passthrough cross-connection between the OC-3x4 in slot 9 port 1 sts 1 and slot 10 port 1 sts 1:
DLT-CRS-STS1:NEWYORK:OC3-9-1-1,OC3-10-1-1:CTAG12::2WAY;
For the SEATTLE network element, delete the bidirectional STS-1 cross-connection between the DS3x3 circuit pack in slot 9 port 1 and the path protected OC-3x4 interfaces in slot 9 port 1 sts 1 and slot 10 port 1 sts 1:
DLT-CRS-STS1:SEATTLE:OC3-9-1-1,DS3-9-1:CTAG12:: 2WAYPR:SWMATE=OC3-10-1-1;
DLT-CRS-STS12C
The Delete Cross-connect STS-12c command is used to delete an STS-12c cross-connect between two STS-12c facilities. Note: Bandwidth assigned to a Resilient Packet Ring (RPR) cannot be removed until all Packet Edge circuit packs have been detached from the RPR. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-CRS-STS12C:[TID]:FromAID,ToAID:CTAG::[CCT] :[SWMATE=Domain]; Table 2-143 Syntax definition Field TID FromAID Purpose Target identifier From access identifier. The STS-12c facility at one end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the FromAID specifies the signal source. To access identifier. The STS-12c facility at the other end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the ToAID specifies the signal destination. Correlation tag Cross-connection type The path protection for the FromAID when the CCT is protected. That is, when the CCT is one of 1WAYPR or 2WAYPR.
ToAID
CTAG CCT SWMATE
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-129 Table 2-144 AID descriptions AID type STS-12c Facility AID Command-specific values Purpose OC12-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-48 circuit pack where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37 Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37, ... 181 Identify the STS-12c facility on the WAN port of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 sts# = 1 Identify the RPR where index# = 1 to 8
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
RPR AID
IPTR-index#
Table 2-145 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values CCT 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR IPTRING Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection (default) Unidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional bridge ring connection SONET bandwith allocation for RPR
2-130 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-145 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values SWMATE Description
OC12-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-12c facility where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12, 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 sts# = 1 OC48-slot#-sts# Identify the STS-12c facility where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37 Identify the STS-12c facility where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37, ... 181
OC192-slot#-sts#
Example input
For network element NEWYORK, delete the bidirectional STS-12c pass-through cross-connect between OC-48, slot 11, sts 1 and OC-48, slot 12, sts 25:
DLT-CRS-STS12C:NEWYORK:OC48-11-1,OC48-12-25:CTAG12::2WAY;
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-CRS-STS24C
The Delete Cross-connect STS-24c command is used to delete an STS-24c cross-connect between two STS-24c facilities. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ToAID
CTAG CCT SWMATE
2-132 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-147 AID descriptions AID type STS-24c Facility AID Command-specific values OC48-slot#-sts# Purpose Identify the STS-24c facility on an OC-48 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1, 25 Identify the STS-24c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 25, ... 169 Identify the STS-24c facility on the WAN port of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 sts# = 1
OC192-slot#-sts#
Table 2-148 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR SWMATE OC48-slot#-sts# Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection (default) Unidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional bridge ring connection Identify the STS-24c facility where slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1, 25 Identify the STS-24c facility where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 25, ... 169
OC192-slot#-sts#
Example input
For the NEWYORK network element, delete the bidirectional STS-24c passthrough cross-connection between the OC-48 STS in slot 11 sts 1 and slot 12 sts 25:
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-CRS-STS3C
The Delete Cross-connect STS-3c command is used to delete an STS-3c cross-connect between two STS-3c facilities. Note: Bandwidth assigned to a Resilient Packet Ring (RPR) cannot be removed until all Packet Edge circuit packs have been detached from the RPR. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-CRS-STS3C:[TID]:FromAID,ToAID:CTAG::[CCT]:[SWMATE=Domain]; Table 2-149 Syntax definition Field TID FromAID Purpose Target identifier From access identifier. The STS-3c facility at one end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the FromAID specifies the signal source. To access identifier. The STS-3c facility at the other end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the ToAID specifies the signal destination. Correlation tag Cross-connection type Path protection Switch Mate. Path protection for the FromAID OC-3, OC-3x4, OC-12, OC-12x4, OC-48, OC-48 STS, or OC-192 interface only when the CCT is protected. That is, when the CCT is one of 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR.
ToAID
CTAG CCT SWMATE
2-134 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-150 AID descriptions AID type STS-3c Facility AID Command-specific values OC3-slot#-port#-sts# Purpose Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-3 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# =1 Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, or 10 Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ...to 46 Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ...to 190 Identify the STS-3c facility on the WAN port where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 for 2x100BT-P2P, 4x100FX-P2P, or 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1, 4, 7, ... 19 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P Identify the STS-3c facility on the WAN port where slot = 3 to 6; port = 1 to 8 sts = 1; Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4 Identify the RPR where index# = 1 to 8
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
WAN-slot-port-sts%HLINK-Hline-HslotHport
RPR AID
IPTR-index#
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-135 Table 2-151 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR IPTRING SWMATE OC3-slot#-port#-sts# Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection (default) Unidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional bridge ring connection SONET bandwith allocation for RPR Identify the STS-3c facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1
OC12-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-3c facility where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7 or 10 OC48-slot#-sts# Identify the STS-3c facility where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ...to 46 Identify the STS-3c facility where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ...to 190
OC192-slot#-sts#
Example input
For the NEWYORK network element, delete the bidirectional STS-3c passthrough cross-connection between the OC-3x4 in slots 9 and 10:
DLT-CRS-STS3C:NEWYORK:OC3-9-1-1,OC3-10-1-1:CTAG12::2WAY;
Deprovision the bandwidth from an RPR

DLT-CRS-STS3C:OC3SP:OC3-9-1-1,IPTR-1:CTAG12::IPTRING; DLT-CRS-STS3C:OC3SP:OC3-10-1-1,IPTR-1:CTAG12::IPTRING;
DLT-CRS-STS48C
The Delete Cross-connect STS-48c command is used to delete an STS-48c cross-connect between two STS-48c facilities. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ToAID
CTAG CCT SWMATE
Table 2-153 AID descriptions AID type STS-48c Facility AID Command-specific values OC48-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-sts# Purpose slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 49, ... 145
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-137 Table 2-154 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR SWMATE OC48-slot#-sts# Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection (default) Unidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional bridge ring connection Identify the STS-48c facility where slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1 Identify the STS-48c facility where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 49 ... 145
OC192-slot#-sts#
Example input
For the NEWYORK network element, delete the bidirectional STS-48c passthrough cross-connection between the OC-48 STS in slot 11 sts 1 and slot 12 sts 1:
DLT-CRS-VT1
The Delete Cross-connect VT1.5 command is used to delete a VT1.5 cross-connect from between two VT1.5 facilities. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-CRS-VT1:[TID]:FromAID,ToAID:CTAG::[CCT]:[SWMATE=Domain]; Table 2-155 Syntax definition Field TID FromAID Purpose Target identifier From access identifier. The VT1.5 path facility at one end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the FromAID specifies the signal source. To access identifier. The VT1.5 path facility at the other end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the ToAID specifies the signal destination. Correlation tag Cross-connection type Path protection Switch Mate. Path protection for the FromAID OC-3, OC-3x4, OC-12 or OC-48 interface only when the CCT is protected. That is, when the CCT is one of 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR.
ToAID
CTAG CCT SWMATE
Table 2-156 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose slot# = 4 to 10 port# = 1 to 12 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28 DS1 service module port# = 1 to 84 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4
VT1.5 facility DS1-slot#-port# AID DS1-slot#-port#-t1# DS1-slot#-port#-ALL DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-OC3hslot#-hport#
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-139 Table 2-156 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values DS1-DFLT-grp#-%HLINK-OC3hslot#-hport# Purpose DS1 service module grp# = 1 to 3 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 sts# = 1 to 12 vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 48 vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port # = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port # = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 for sts# = 1 or 2 vtg# = 1 or 2 for sts# = 3 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 8 sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 for sts# = 1 or 2 vtg# = 1 or 2 for sts# = 3 vt# = 1 to 4
OC3-slot#-sts#-port#-vtg#-vt# OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-ALL OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL
OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt# OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-ALL OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL OC48-slot#-sts#-vtg#-vt# OC48-slot#-sts#-vtg#-ALL OC48-slot#-sts#-ALL EC1-slot#-port#-vtg#-vt# EC1-slot#-port#-vtg#-ALL EC1-slot#-port#-ALL
MS DSM WAN facility
WAN-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt#%HLINK-Hline-Hslot#-Hport# WAN-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-ALL%HLINK-Hline-Hslot#-Hport# WAN-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL%HLINK-Hline-Hslot#-Hport#
SMART AID
DS1-DFLT-grp#
grp# = 1 to 3
Use the DFLT-# smart AID to delete one of three sets of 28 DS1s cross-connected to VT1.5s within an STS-1. For each possible DFLT-# value, a specific set of 28 ports is cross-connected to an STS-1. For example, the DFLT-2 set of DS1 ports can be mapped to STS1-3. This causes DS1 ports 29 through 56 to be cross-connected to STS1-3. Table 2-157 shows the DFLT-# smart AID value and the corresponding ports.
Table 2-157 DFLT-# smart AID values DFLT-# 1 2 3 Ports 1 to 28 29 to 56 57 to 84 Equivalent facilities DS1-4-1 DS1-6-4 DS1-6-5 DS1-8-8 DS1-8-9 DS1-10-12
Table 2-158 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR SWMATE OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-ALL OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection (default) Unidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional bridge ring connection Identify the VT1.5 facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3, 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3, vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4
OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt# Identify the VT1.5 facility where OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-ALL slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL sts# = 1 to 12, vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 OC48-slot#-sts#-vtg#-vt# OC48-slot#-sts#-vtg#-ALL OC48-slot#-sts#-ALL Identify the VT1.5 facility where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 48, vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4
Optical Metro 3500
Example input
For the NEWYORK network element, delete a VT1.5 bidirectional cross-connect between the DS1 mapper in slot 4 and the path protected optical interfaces in slots 8 and 9:
DLT-CRS-VT1:NEWYORK: OC3-8-2-1-1-2,DS1-4-1:CTAG45:: 2WAYPR:SWMATE=OC3-9-2-1-1-3;
For the WASHINGTON network element, delete 28 bidirectional VT1.5 cross-connects between the DFLT-1 VT1.5 facilities (DS1 ports 1 to 12 on the slot 4 DS1 mapper, DS1 ports 1 to 12 on the slot 5 DS1 mapper and DS1 ports 1 to 4 on the slot 6 DS1 mapper), from the path protected optical interfaces in slots 9 and 11:
DLT-CRS-VT1:WASHINGTON:OC3-9-3-1-ALL,DS1-DFLT-1:CTAG89:: 2WAYPR:SWMATE=OC3-11-3-1-ALL;
DLT-EC1
The Delete EC-1 command is used to eliminate the EC-1 facility from the EC-1 circuit pack; the EC-1 facility provisioning information is deleted and all other information (errors, monitoring points) is ignored. Before you delete an EC-1 facility, you must delete all connections on the facility, delete any SDCC links on the EC-1, ensure the facility is not used as a timing reference, and put the facility OOS. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-EC1:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-159 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. EC-1 facility to act on. Correlation tag
Table 2-160 AID descriptions AID type EC1 AID Command-specific values EC1-slot#-port# EC1-slot-ALL Purpose Identify the EC-1 slot where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port # = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port # = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12
Example input
Delete the EC-1 facility in slot 7 port 2:

DLT-EC1:SEATTLE:EC1-7-2:CTAG04;
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-EQPT
The Delete Equipment command is used to delete the provisioning information for the specified equipment. When you delete OC-3x4, OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS equipment, the section data communications channel (SDCC) link is also affected (layers 1, 2). Note 1: Equipment cannot be deleted if any facilities are provisioned on the equipment except the OC-3/OC-12 facilities for aggregate circuit packs of the MS DSM. The working aggregate equipment can only be deleted once the following has been completed: The on-board OCN facility has been taken out-of-service All DS1, DS3, and 10/100 BaseT facilities have been deleted The on-board PSM equipment has been deleted The aggregate equipment has been taken Out Of Service Protection aggregate equipment and all expansion PSM equipment are not provisioned/deleted Note 2: The protection aggregate equipment can only be deleted once the following has been completed: The OCN facility has been taken out-of-service The on-board PSM equipment has been deleted The aggregate equipment has been taken out-of-service Note 3: The OC-3 facility of the DS1 service module must be taken out of service. The facility cannot be deleted. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-EQPT:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-161 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. Equipment to act on. Correlation tag
2-144 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-162 AID descriptions AID type DS1 AID DS3 AID DS3VT AID DS3/EC1 AID OC-3 AID OC-12 AID Command-specific Purpose values DS1-slot# DS3-slot# DS3V-slot# DS3EC1-slot# OC3-slot# OC12-slot# Identify the DS1 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS3 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS3VTx12 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS3/EC1x12 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the OC-3 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS equipment where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS Identify the OC-48 equipment where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS Identify the OC-48 DWDM SFP module where slot# = 3 to 12, port# = 1 Identify the OC-192 equipment where slot# = 11, 12 Identify the EC-1 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the ILAN equipment Identify the protection switch controller Identify the protection switch extender Note: The PSX can only be deleted if DS1-6-5 and higher do not exist. NP AID IPT100 AID GE AID NP IPT100-slot# GE-slot#-port# Identify the network processor Identify the 4x100BT equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 2xGigE 2.5G SFP module where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port#=1, 2
OC-48 AID
OC48-slot#
OC-48 DWDM SFP AID OC-192 AID EC1 AID ILAN AID PSC AID PSX AID
POC48-slot#-port#
OC192-slot# EC1-slot# ILAN PSC PSX
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-145 Table 2-162 (continued) AID descriptions AID type 1GE AID Command-specific Purpose values 1GE-slot# Identify the 2xGigE equipment where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 for double slot cards and slot#=3 to 10 for single slot 2xGigE. Identify the 4x100FX equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 2x100BT-P2P circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 4x100FX-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 8x100BT-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10
100FX AID 100BTFOS AID 1GFOS AID
100FX-slot# 100BTFOS-slot# 1GFOS-slot#
100FOSO AID 100FOST AID
100FOSO-slot# 100FOST-slot#
1GE25G AID 1GE25G-slot# GEFC AID GEFC-slot#-port#
Identify the 2xGigE 2.5G equipment where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 Identify the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P SFP module, where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1, 2
DS1TM AID
DS1TM-slot#-% Identify the DSM DS1 termination module, HLINK-OC3-hslot#- where hport# slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
2-146 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-162 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific Purpose values Identify the MS DSM Aggregate equipment, where HLINE= OC3 slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the MS DSM Aggregate equipment, where HLINE= OC3 or OC12 slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the MS DSM DS3 Expansion equipment, where HLINE=OC3 or OC12 slot# = 3 to 6, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the MS DSM 10/100BaseT Expansion equipment, where HLINE=OC3 or OC12 slot# = 3 to 6, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the MS DSM OC-3 SFP, where HLINE=OC3 slot# = 1 or 2, port#=1, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the MS DSM OC-3/12 SFP, where HLINE=OC3 or OC12 slot# = 1 or 2, port# = 1, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
MS DSM AID AGGOC3-slot#-% HLINK- HLINEhslot#-hport# AGGOC3OC12slot#-% HLINK- HLINEhslot#-hport# PECN-slot#%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport# PFOST-slot#%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport# POC3-slot#-port#%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport# POC3OC12-slot#port#-%HLINKHLINE-hslot#hport# Example input
Delete the DS1 circuit pack in slot 4:

DLT-EQPT:NEWYORK:DS1-4:CTAG23;
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-ETH
Use the Delete Ethernet command to deprovision an Ethernet facility of a 2x100BT-P2P, 8x100BT-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 4x100FX-P2P or 2xGigE-P2P. The command deletes facility provisioning information. Other information (errors, monitoring points) is ignored. Before you delete an Ethernet facility, you must delete all connections on the WAN port associated with the Ethernet facility and put the Ethernet facility out-of-service (OOS). To delete connections, see: DLT-CRS-STS1 on page 2-124 DLT-CRS-STS3C on page 2-133 DLT-CRS-STS12C on page 2-128 DLT-CRS-STS24C on page 2-131 To put an Ethernet facility OOS, see RMV-ETH on page 3-393. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-ETH:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-163 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The Ethernet facility to deprovision. Correlation tag
2-148 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-164 AID descriptions AID type ETH AID Command-specific values ETH-slot#-port# ETH-slot#-ALL Purpose Identify the Ethernet facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 2 for all the other supported cards slot = 3 to 6; port = 1 to 8 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to10 Hport = 1 to 4
MS DSM Ethernet Facility
ETH-slot-port-%HLINK-HlineHslot-Hport
Example input
Deprovision ETH port 1 of the 2x100BT-P2P circuit pack in slot 7 of network element OTTAWA:
DLT-ETH:OTTAWA:ETH-7-1:CTAG01;
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-FAC
The Delete Facility command is used to delete an NP facility. NP facilities include ILANSP, ILANNP, ILAN1, ILAN2, COLAN, and X25. ILANSP and ILANNP are autoprovisioned and cannot be manually deprovisioned. Note: You cannot delete a COLAN facility if any of the GRE facilities are active. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-FAC:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-165 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 2-166 AID descriptions AID type AID Command-specific values Purpose ILAN1 ILAN2 COLAN X25 ALL Intershelf LAN-1 Intershelf LAN-2 Central office LAN X.25 All facility entities Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The NP facility to act on. Correlation tag
Note: An AID of ALL is supported but command execution will stop if the operation fails for one facility. In this case, delete each facility individually. Example input
Delete the ILAN-2 facility on OC3NP:

DLT-FAC:OC3NP:ILAN2:CTAG24;
DLT-FC
Use the Delete Fibre Channel command to deprovision a Fibre Channel facility (FC port) on the GE/FC SFP of a 2xGigE/FC-P2P or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C circuit pack. The command deletes facility provisioning information. Other information (errors, monitoring points) is ignored. Before you delete a Fibre Channel facility, you must delete all connections on the WAN port associated with the Fibre Channel facility and put the Fibre Channel facility out-of-service (OOS). To delete connections, see: DLT-CRS-STS1 on page 2-124 DLT-CRS-STS3C on page 2-133 DLT-CRS-STS12C on page 2-128 DLT-CRS-STS24C on page 2-131 To put a Fibre Channel facility OOS, see RMV-FC on page 3-394. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-FC:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-167 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The Fibre Channel facility to deprovision. Correlation tag
Table 2-168 AID descriptions AID type FC Command-specific values Purpose FC-slot#-port# FC-slot#-ALL Identify the Fibre Channel facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2
Example input
Deprovision FC port 1 of the GE/FC SFP of a 2xGigE/FC-P2P or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C circuit pack in slot 7 of network element OTTAWA:
DLT-FC:OTTAWA:FC-7-1:CTAG01;
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-FFP-OC12
The Delete FFP OC-12 command is used to delete 1+1 protection for an OC-12 linear facility. Of the pair, the protection facility is in the even slot. The protection OC-12 facility must be OOS-MA (out of service maintenance for memory administration) before the FFP can be deleted. The OC-12 and OC-12x4 STS run in simplex mode once you delete the FFP. Connections on the protection OC-12 are deleted when you delete the FFP. Deleting protection also affects how the section data communication channel (SDCC) operates. Note 1: Ensure that facilities on the protection circuit pack are out of service. Note 2: You cannot execute this command if there is an active test access session on this facility. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-FFP-OC12:[TID]:workingOC12AID,protectionOC12AID:CTAG; Table 2-169 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 2-170 AID descriptions AID type working OC-12 AID Command-specific Purpose values OC12-slot#-port# Identify the slot number of the working facility slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9, or 11 for OC-12 slot# = 3, 5, 7, or 9 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12, 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS Identify the slot number of the protection facility slot# = 4, 6, 8, 10, or 12 for OC-12 slot# = 4, 6, 8, or 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12, 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. OC-12 facility to act on. Correlation tag
protection OC-12 AID
OC12-slot#-port#
Example input
Delete 1+1 protection for the OC-12 facility in slot 7 port 1 and slot 8 port 1:
DLT-FFP-OC12:SEATTLE:OC12-7-1,OC12-8-1:CTAG13;
DLT-FFP-OC192
The Delete FFP OC-192 command is used to delete the specified protection scheme for an OC-192 facility. The OC-192 protection facility is in the even slot. The OC-192 protection facility must be OOS-MA (out of service maintenance for memory administration) before the FFP can be deleted. The OC-192 equipment runs in simplex mode once you delete the FFP. Connections on the protection OC-192 are deleted when you delete the FFP. Deleting protection also affects how the section data communication channel (SDCC) operates. Note: You cannot execute this command if there is an active test access session on this facility. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-FFP-OC192:[TID]:workingOC192AID,protectionOC192AID:CTAG :::[PS=Domain]; Table 2-171 Syntax definition Field TID workingOC192AID protectionOC192AID CTAG PS Purpose Target identifier Working side access identifier. OC-192 facility to act on. Protection side access identifier. OC-192 facility to act on. Correlation tag Protection scheme to delete
Table 2-172 AID descriptions AID type working OC-192 AID Command-specific Purpose values OC192-slot# Identifies the slot number of the working OC-192 where slot# = 11 Identifies the slot number of the protection OC-192 where slot# = 12
protection OC-192 OC192-slot# AID (see Note)
Note: Ensure that facilities on the protection circuit pack are out of service.
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-153 Table 2-173 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values PS 1PLUS1 BLSR_2FR Example input Description Delete the 1+1 linear protection scheme (default) Delete the 2-Fiber BLSR protection scheme
Delete 1+1 protection for the OC-192 facility in slot 11and slot 12:
DLT-FFP-OC192:SEATTLE:OC192-11,OC192-12:CTAG13;
DLT-FFP-OC3
The Delete FFP OC-3 command is used to delete 1+1 protection for an OC-3 linear facility. Of the pair, the protection facility is in the even slot. The protection OC-3 facility must be OOS-MA (out of service maintenance for memory administration) before the FFP can be deleted. The OC-3 and OC-3x4 equipment runs in simplex mode once you delete the FFP. Connections on the protection OC-3 are deleted when you delete the FFP. Deleting protection also affects how the section data communication channel (SDCC) operates. Note 1: Ensure that facilities on the protection circuit pack are out of service. Note 2: You cannot execute this command if there is an active test access session on this facility. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-FFP-OC3:[TID]:workingOC3AID,protectionOC3AID:CTAG; Table 2-174 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. OC-3 facility to act on. Correlation tag
Table 2-175 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the slot number of the working OC-3 where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 Identify the slot number of the protection OC-3 where slot# = 4, 6, 8, 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4
working OC3 OC3-slot#-port# AID
protection OC3 AID
OC3-slot#-port#
Example input
Delete 1+1 protection for the OC-3 facility in slot 9 port 1 and slot 10 port 1:
DLT-FFP-OC3:SEATTLE:OC3-9-1,OC3-10-1:CTAG13;
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-FFP-OC48
The Delete FFP OC-48 command is used to delete the specified protection scheme for an OC-48 facility. The OC-48 protection facility is in the even slot. The OC-48 protection facility must be OOS-MA (out of service maintenance for memory administration) before the FFP can be deleted. The OC-48 or OC-48 STS equipment runs in simplex mode once you delete the FFP. Connections on the protection OC-48 are deleted when you delete the FFP. Deleting protection also affects how the section data communication channel (SDCC) operates. Note: You cannot execute this command if there is an active test access session on this facility. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-FFP-OC48:[TID]:workingOC48AID,protectionOC48AID:CTAG :::[PS=Domain]; Table 2-176 Syntax definition Field TID workingOC48AID protectionOC48AID CTAG PS Purpose Target identifier Working side access identifier. OC-48 facility to act on. Protection side access identifier. OC-48 facility to act on. Correlation tag Protection scheme to delete
2-156 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-177 AID descriptions AID type working OC-48 AID Command-specific values OC48-slot# Purpose Identifies the slot number of the working OC-48 or OC-48 STS slot# = 11 for OC-48 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9, or 11 for OC-48 STS Identifies the slot number of the protection OC-48 or OC-48 STS slot# = 12 for OC-48 slot# = 4, 6, 8, 10, or 12 for OC-48 STS
protection OC-48 AID (see Note)
OC48-slot#
Note: Ensure that facilities on the protection circuit pack are out of service. Table 2-178 Parameter descriptions Parameter PS Possible values 1PLUS1 BLSR_2FR Description Delete the 1+1 linear protection scheme (default) Delete the 2-Fiber BLSR protection scheme
Example input
Delete 1+1 protection for the OC-48 facility in slot 11and slot 12:
DLT-FFP-OC48:SEATTLE:OC48-11,OC48-12:CTAG13;
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-GRE
The Delete GRE command is used to delete a specific GRE tunnel. This command is supported on the network processor only. Note: If GRE is provisioned on a Release 14.1 (or higher) network processor running on a Release 11.12 or Release 11.5 Optical Metro 3300/3400 shelf, you will need to re-perform system lineup and testing (SLAT) of the Optical Metro 3300/3400 shelf if GRE is deleted on the Release 14.1 (or higher) network processor and the Release 14.1 (or higher) network processor is replaced with a Release 11.12 or Release 11.5 network processor Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-GRE:[TID]:[AID]:CTAG; Table 2-179 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier 0 - 26 (0 to the maximum GRE ID of 26) Correlation tag
Note: Deleting GRE-0 causes the COLAN to transition from OOS-GRE to IS. Example input
Delete the GRE tunnel on OC3NP:

DLT-GRE:OC3NP::CTAG24;
DLT-IPT
Use the Delete IPT command to detach a Packet Edge circuit pack from a Resilient Packet Ring (RPR). Note: You must detach a Packet Edge circuit pack from an RPR before you can deprovision the circuit pack. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-IPT:[TID]:IPTAID,IPTRAID:CTAG; Table 2-180 Syntax definition Field TID IPTAID CTAG IPTRAID Purpose Target identifier Circuit pack to act upon Correlation tag RPR to act upon
Table 2-181 AID descriptions AID IPTAID Possible values IPT100-slot# 100FX-slot# 1GE-slot# Description Detach a 4x100BT circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 Detach a 4x100FX circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 Detach a 2xGigE circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 for double slot circuit packs and slot#= 3 to 10 for single slot 2xGigE circuit pack. Detach a 2xGigE 2.5G circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 RPR entity to act upon where Index# = 1 to 8
1GE25G-slot# IPTR AID IPTR-Index#
Example input
Detach a 4x100BT circuit pack from an RPR:

DLT-IPT:OC3SP:IPT100-7,IPTR-1:123;
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-IPTR
Use the Delete IPTR command to deprovision a Resilient Packet Ring (RPR). Before you delete an RPR, you must delete SONET bandwidth assigned to the RPR detach all Packet Edge circuit packs from the RPR Note: Refer to the DLT-CRS-STS1/STS3C/STS12C commands. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-IPTR:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-182 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
Table 2-183 AID descriptions AID IPTR AID Possible values IPTR-Index# Description RPR entity to act upon where Index# = 1 to 8
Example input
Deprovision an RPR:
DLT-IPTR:OC3SP:IPTR-3:123;
DLT-LLSDCC
The Delete Lower Layer SDCC command is used to delete a section data communications channel (SDCC) link (layers 1 and 2) on the specified AID. Note: You cannot delete the SDCC link on OCn facilities related to the DSM. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-LLSDCC:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-184 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 2-185 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose OC-3 AID OC-12 AID OC3-slot#-port# Identify the OC-3 where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3, 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 Identify the OC-12 where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS Identify the OC-48 where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS Identify the OC-192 where slot# = 11 or 12 Identify the EC-1 where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9, port# = 1 to 3 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The equipment to act on. Correlation tag
OC12-slot#-port#
OC-48 AID OC-192 AID
OC48-slot#
OC192-slot#
EC-1 AID EC1-slot#-port#
Note: SDCC is not supported on EC-1x12 circuit packs Example input
Delete the lower layer SDCC link for the OC-3x4 circuit pack in slot 7, port 1:
DLT-LLSDCC:NEWYORK:OC3-7-1:CTAG34; Optical Metro 3500 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
DLT-OC12
The Delete OC-12 command is used to eliminate the OC-12 facility from the OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack. The OC-12 facility provisioning information is deleted and all other information (errors, monitoring points) is ignored. Before you delete an OC-12 facility, you must delete all connections on the facility delete any SDCC links on the OC-12 ensure the facility is not used as a timing reference put the facility OOS delete the FFP Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-OC12:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-186 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. OC-12 facility to act on. Correlation tag
Table 2-187 AID descriptions AID type OC-12 AID Command-specific values OC12-slot#-port# Purpose Identify the OC-12 facility where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS
Example input
Delete the OC-12 facility in slot 7 port 1:

DLT-OC12:SEATTLE:OC12-7-1:CTAG04;
DLT-OC192
The Delete OC-192 command is used to eliminate the OC-192 facility from the OC-192 circuit pack. The OC-192 facility provisioning information is deleted and all other information (errors, monitoring points) is ignored. Before you delete an OC-192 facility, you must delete all connections on the facility delete any SDCC links on the OC-192 ensure the facility is not used as a timing reference delete the FFP put the facility OOS Security level Level 3 Input syntax
Table 2-189 AID descriptions AID type OC-192 AID Command-specific values OC192-slot# Purpose Identifies the OC-192 facility slot# = 11, 12
Example input
Delete the OC-192 facility in slot 11:

DLT-OC192:SEATTLE:OC19211:CTAG04;
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-OC3
The Delete OC-3 command is used to eliminate the OC-3 facility from the OC-3 or OC-3x4 circuit pack; the OC-3 facility provisioning information is deleted and all other information (errors, monitoring points) is ignored. Before you delete an OC-3 facility, you must delete all connections on the facility, delete any SDCC links on the OC-3, ensure the facility is not used as a timing reference, delete the FFP and put the facility OOS. The following cannot be deleted on the Host OC-3 prov-link, and DSM circuit packs OC3 line facility: SDCC links on the OC-3 FFP Security level Level 3 Input syntax
Table 2-191 AID descriptions AID type OC3 AID Command-specific values OC3-slot#-port# OC3-slot#-ALL Purpose Identify the OC-3 slot where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4
Example input
Delete the OC-3 facility in slot 10 port 1:

DLT-OC3:SEATTLE:OC3-10-1:CTAG04;
DLT-OC48
The Delete OC-48 command is used to eliminate the OC-48 facility from the OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack. The OC-48 facility provisioning information is deleted and all other information (errors, monitoring points) is ignored. Before you delete an OC-48 facility, you must delete all connections on the facility delete any SDCC links on the OC-48 ensure the facility is not used as a timing reference delete the FFP put the facility OOS Security level Level 3 Input syntax
Table 2-193 AID descriptions AID type OC-48 AID Command-specific values OC48-slot# Purpose Identifies the OC-48 facility slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS
Example input
Delete the OC-48 facility in slot 11:

DLT-OC48:SEATTLE:OC48-11:CTAG04;
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-PROV
The Delete Provisioning (DLT-PROV) command is used to delete shelf processor backups that reside on the network processor. For each shelf processor backup directory that is deleted from the network processor, a TL1 message stating that the backup has been deleted is displayed. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-PROV:[TID]::CTAG::[DLTALL]:[DLTBKUP=Domain]; Table 2-194 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG DLTALL DLTBKUP Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Deletes all shelf processor backups on a network processor Specifies the TID of a shelf processor whose backup is to be deleted from a network processor
Table 2-195 Parameter descriptions Parameter DLTALL DLTBKUP Possible values DLT_ALL_BACKUPS TID of shelf processor Description Delete all shelf processor backups on the network processor Name of the shelf processor whose backup is to be deleted from the network processor
Delete the provisioning data on network processor MONTREAL that was backed-up from shelf processor OTTAWA:
DLT-PROV:MONTREAL::CTAG:::DLTBKUP=OTTAWA;
The response displayed is as follows:

MONTREAL 98-07-30 04:03:35 M A COMPLD Deleting SP Backups from NP Backup for OTTAWA deleted
Response block syntax The response display is as follows:

<SID><DATE><TIME> Deleting SP Backups from NP Backup for <TID> deleted
If no SP backups are deleted, the response display is as follows:

<SID><DATE><TIME> Deleting SP Backups from NP No Backups deleted Table 2-196 Response parameter descriptions Parameter SID DATE, TIME TID Description Source identifier of the network processor storing the shelf processor data Date and time of shelf processor deletion Target identifier of each shelf processor deleted
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-PVC
The Delete Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) command deletes an X.25 PVC. Deleting a PVC restores the circuit to a switched virtual circuit (SVC) with default values from ULX25. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-PVC:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-197 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 2-198 AID descriptions AID type AID Command-specific values Purpose 0 to 15 Identify the X.25 virtual circuit to act upon Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The PVC to delete. Correlation tag
Example input
Delete PVC #11 and then retrieve VC #11:

DLT-PVC:OC3NP:11:CTAG45; RTRV-VC:OC3NP:11:CTAG45;
VC #11 is now an SVC with default values retrieved from the ULX25 database.
DLT-RINGMAP
Use the Delete Ring Map command to delete map information for a node in a BLSR ring. This command is supported on the network processor. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-RINGMAP:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[SID][,APSID]; Table 2-199 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SID APSID Table 2-200 AID descriptions AID type Ring name Command-specific values Purpose Purpose Target identifier. Ring name Correlation tag Node name APS ID of the node
Table 2-201 Parameter descriptions Parameter SID APSID Possible values Description
An alphanumeric string between 1 Node name and 20 characters An integer between 0 and 15 APS ID of the node
Example input
Delete the ring map information for the node SPFGXOTT in the ring RING1:
DLT-RINGMAP:NPFGXOTT:RING1:CTAG::SPFGXOTT,1;
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-ROLL-STS1
The Delete Rollover STS-1 command is used to delete a connection previously established by the ENT-ROLL-STS1 command. The Delete Rollover STS-1 command will return the connection to its original idle state. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-ROLL-STS1:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=Domain,RTO=Domain[,VALID=Domain][,DLTSWMATE=Domain]; Table 2-202 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO VALID DLTSWMATE Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints Second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled AID RFROM is to be rolled to Command execution will be denied if the conditions on the node are inappropriate The switch mate reverts to the original switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit
2-170 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-203 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-1 facility on a DS3 circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3/EC-1x12 Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-3 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3
OC12-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 to 12 OC48-slot#-sts# Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1 to 48
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-171 Table 2-203 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 192 Identify the STS-1 facility on an EC-1 circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port# = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12
EC1-slot#-port#
WAN-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-1 facility on the WAN port where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 for 2x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 3 for 4x100FX-P2Por 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 21 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P Note: The WAN AID only applies to the fromAID and toAID fields. The WAN AID does not apply to the RFROM and RTO fields.
2-172 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-203 (continued) AID descriptions AID type STS1 dacility AID on MS DSM Command-specific values DS3-slot-port%HLINK-Hline-HslotHport Purpose slot = 3 or 5 port = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4 Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-3 circuit pack where sts = 1 to 3 Hslot# = 3 to 10 Hport# = 1 to 4 slot = 3 to 6; port = 1 to 8; sts = 1 to 3 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4 grp = 1 to 3 grp 1 =DS1s 1 to 28 grp 2 = DS1s 29 to 56 grp 3 = DS1s 57 to 84 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4
OC3-1-1-STS%HLINK-OC3Hslot#-Hport#
WAN-slot-port-sts%HLINK-Hline-HslotHport STSMDS1-grp%HLINK-Hline-HslotHport
Table 2-204 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-173 Table 2-204 Parameter descriptions Parameter VALID Possible values Y N (default) DLTSWMATE Y Description Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate The switch mate reverts to the original switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit The switch mate is not affected
N (default) Example input
Rollover an STS-1 connection on the OC-3x4 circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between a DS3 service and the OC-3x4 circuit pack. Bridge the original OC-3 connection:
ENT-ROLL-STS1:OTTAWA:OC3-9-2-1,DS3-3-1:CTAG1::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-2-1,RTO=OC3-9-3-1,VALID=Y,SWMATE=OC3-10-2-1;
Backout of the bridged connection:

DLT-ROLL-STS1:OTTAWA:OC3-9-2-1,DS3-3-1:CTAG1::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-2-1,RTO=OC3-9-3-1,VALID=Y;
DLT-ROLL-STS12C
The Delete Rollover STS-12c command is used to delete a connection previously established by the ENT-ROLL-STS12c command. The Delete Rollover STS-12c command will return the connection to its original idle state. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-ROLL-STS12C:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=Domain,RTO=Domain[,VALID=Domain][,DLTSWMATE=Domain]; Table 2-205 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO VALID DLTSWMATE Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints The second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled AID RFROM is to be rolled to Command execution will be denied if the conditions on the node are inappropriate Delete switch mate. The switch mate reverts to the original switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-175 Table 2-206 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose STS12C facility AID OC-12-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-48 circuit pack where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37 Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37, ... 181 Identify the STS-12c facility on the WAN port of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 sts# = 1 Note: The WAN AID only applies to the fromAID and toAID fields. The WAN AID does not apply to RFROM and RTO. Table 2-207 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
2-176 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-207 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter VALID Possible values Y N (default) DLTSWMATE Y N (default) Example input Description Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate The switch mate reverts to the original switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit The Switch Mate is not affected
Rollover an STS-12c connection on the OC-12 circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between an OC-12 service and the OC-12 circuit pack. Bridge the original OC-12 connection:
ENT-ROLL-STS12C:OTTAWA:OC12-9-1-1,OC12-8-1-1:CTAG1::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC12-9-1-1,RTO=OC12-7-1-1:VALID=Y;
Backout of the bridge connection:

DLT-ROLL-STS12C:OTTAWA:OC12-9-1-1,OC12-8-1-1:CTAG1::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC12-9-1-1,RTO=OC12-7-1-1,VALID=Y;
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-ROLL-STS24C
2-178 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-209 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-24c facility on an OC-48 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1, 25 Identify the STS-24c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 25, ... 169 Identify the STS-24c facility on the WAN port of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 sts# = 1 Note: The WAN AID only applies to the fromAID and toAID fields. The WAN AID does not apply to RFROM and RTO. Table 2-210 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR VALID Y N (default) DLTSWMATE Y Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate The switch mate reverts to the original switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit The Switch Mate is not affected
STS24C OC-48-slot#-sts# facility AID
OC192-slot#-sts#
N (default)
Optical Metro 3500
Rollover an STS-24c connection on the OC-48 STS circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between an OC-48 STS circuit pack and another OC-48 STS circuit pack. Bridge the original OC-48 connection:
ENT-ROLL-STS24C:OTTAWA:OC48-9-1,OC48-8-1:CTAG1::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC48-9-1,RTO=OC48-7-1:VALID=Y;

DLT-ROLL-STS24C:OTTAWA:OC48-9-1,OC48-8-1:CTAG1::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC48-9-1,RTO=OC48-7-1,VALID=Y;
DLT-ROLL-STS3C
The Delete Rollover STS-3c command is used to delete a connection previously established by the ENT-ROLL-STS3C command. The Delete Rollover STS-3c command will return the connection to its original idle state. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-ROLL-STS3C:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=Domain,RTO=Domain[,VALID=Domain][,DLTSWMATE=Domain]; Table 2-211 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO VALID DLTSWMATE Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints The second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled AID RFROM is to be rolled to Command execution will be denied if the conditions on the node are inappropriate The switch mate reverts to the original switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-181 Table 2-212 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-3 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1
OC12-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, or 10 OC48-slot#-sts# Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack where slot# =11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ..., 46 Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# =11, 12 sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ..., 190 Identify the STS-3c facility on the WAN port where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 for 2x100BT-P2P, 4x100FX-P2P, or 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1, 4, 7, ... 19 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P Note: The WAN AID only applies to the fromAID and toAID fields. The WAN AID does not apply to the RFROM and RTO fields.
OC192-slot#-sts#
2-182 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-212 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-3c facility on the WAN port where slot = 3 to 6; port = 1 to 8 sts = 1; Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4
STS3C WAN-slot-port-stsfacility AID %HLINK-Hline-HslotHport
Table 2-213 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR VALID Y N (default) DLTSWMATE Y Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate The switch mate reverts to the original switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit The Switch Mate is not affected
Rollover an STS-3c connection on the OC-3x4 circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between an OC-3 service and the OC-3x4 circuit pack. Bridge the original OC-3 connection:
ENT-ROLL-STS3C:OTTAWA:OC3-9-1-1,OC3-8-1-1:CTAG1::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-1-1,RTO=OC3-7-1-1:VALID=Y;

DLT-ROLL-STS3C:OTTAWA:OC3-9-1-1,OC3-8-1-1:CTAG1::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-1-1,RTO=OC3-7-1-1,VALID=Y;
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-ROLL-STS48C
Table 2-215 AID descriptions AID type STS48C facility AID Command-specific values Purpose OC-48-slot#-sts# slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1 slot# =11, 12 sts# = 1, 49, 97, ... 145
OC192-slot#-sts#
2-184 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-216 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR VALID Y N (default) DLTSWMATE Y Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate The switch mate reverts to the original switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit The Switch Mate is not affected
Rollover an STS-48c connection on the OC-48 STS circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between an OC-48 STS circuit pack and another OC-48 STS circuit pack. Bridge the original OC-48 connection:
ENT-ROLL-STS48C:OTTAWA:OC48-9-1,OC48-8-1:CTAG1::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC48-9-1,RTO=OC48-7-1:VALID=Y;

DLT-ROLL-STS48C:OTTAWA:OC48-9-1,OC48-8-1:CTAG1::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC48-9-1,RTO=OC48-7-1,VALID=Y;
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-ROLL-VT1
The Delete Rollover VT1 command is used to delete a connection previously established by the ENT-ROLL-VT1 command. The Delete Rollover VT1 command will return the connection to its original idle state. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-ROLL-VT1:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=Domain,RTO=Domain[,VALID=Domain][,DLTSWMATE=Domain]; Table 2-217 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO VALID DLTSWMATE Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints Second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled (see Note) AID RFROM is to be rolled to (see Note) Command execution will be denied if the conditions on the node are inappropriate If included in the command, the switch mate reverts to the original switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit
Note: When rolling a switch mate, RFROM=OLDSWMATE, RTO=NEWSWMATE.
2-186 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-218 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose slot# = 4 to 10 port# = 1 to 12 grp = 1 to 3 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28 DS1 service module port# = 1 to 84 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 DS1 service module grp# = 1 to 3 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 sts# = 1 to 12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4
VT1.5 DS1-slot#-port# facility AID DS1-DFLT-grp DS1-slot#-port#-t1# DS1-slot#-port#-ALL DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-OC3-hslot#hport#
DS1-DFLT-grp#-%HLINK-OC3hslot#-hport#
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-187 Table 2-218 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 48 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port# = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 for sts# = 1 or 2 vtg# = 1 or 2 for sts# = 3 vt# = 1 to 4
VT1.5 OC48-slot#-sts#-vtg#-vt# facility AID OC48-slot#-sts#-ALL
Table 2-219 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible value Description 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR VALID Y N (default) DLTSWMATE Y N (default) Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate The switch mate reverts to the original switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR The switch mate is not affected
Reverse the rollover of a VT1.5 connection on the OC-3x4 circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between a DS1 service and the OC-3x4 circuit pack. Bridge the original OC-3 connection:
Backout of the bridged connection:

DLT-ROLL-VT1:OTTAWA:OC3-9-2-1-7-1,DS1-4-4:B::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-2-1-7-1,RTO=OC3-9-3-1-7-1,VALID=Y;
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-SECU-ACCESS
The Delete Security Access command is used to delete network elements from the allow or deny access control list of a specified network element or network processor. Security level Level 4 Input syntax
DLT-SECU-ACCESS:[TID]::CTAG::SID,[ACCESS]; Table 2-220 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG SID ACCESS Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Source identifier of the network element to delete. Grouping is allowed. Delete network elements from the allow list or from the deny list
Table 2-221 Parameter descriptions Parameter ACCESS Possible values ALLOW DENY (default) Example input Description Delete network elements from the allow list Delete network elements from the deny list
Delete network element OTTAWA from the allow list of network element MONTREAL:
DLT-SECU-ACCESS:MONTREAL::CTAG1::OTTAWA,ALLOW;
DLT-SECU-BADPID
The Delete Security Bad Password command is used to remove previously entered words from the list of unusable passwords on the specified network element or network processor. Security level Level 4 Input syntax
DLT-SECU-BADPID:[TID]::CTAG::BADPID;

Table 2-222 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG BADPID Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Word to remove. Grouping is allowed.
Table 2-223 Parameter descriptions Parameter BADPID Possible values Description
A string between eight Word to remove from the list of unusable and ten alphanumeric passwords. characters. ALL Remove all previously entered words from the list of unusable passwords
Example input
Remove the word EXPRESS951 from the list of unusable passwords for all network elements in the span of control where you are logged in:
DLT-SECU-BADPID:ALL::CTAG12::EXPRESS951;
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-SECU-USER
The Delete Security User command is used to delete a user account on the network element or the network processor. To change the UPC, see ED-SECU-USER. Users with ADMIN privilege cannot delete their own UID. This ensures that at least one UID with ADMIN privilege always exists. If a user attempts to delete their UID, the error response /*Privilege, Illegal User Identity*/ is displayed. Security level Level 4 Input syntax
DLT-SECU-USER:[TID]:UID:CTAG;

Table 2-224 Syntax definition Field TID UID CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier User identifier Correlation tag
Delete the user account USER03 from network element NEWYORK:

DLT-SECU-USER:NEWYORK:USER03:CTAG12;
DLT-T1
The Delete T1 command is used to eliminate a DS1 facility from a DS1 circuit pack; the DS1facility provisioning information is deleted and all other information (errors, monitoring points) is ignored. Before you delete a facility, you must delete all connections on the facility, ensure the facility is not used as a timing reference, and put the facility OOS. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-T1:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-225 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. DS1 facilities to act on. Correlation tag
Table 2-226 AID descriptions AID type DS1 AID DS3V AID Command-specific values DS1-slot#-port# DS1-slot#-ALL DS1-slot#-port#-t1# DS1-slot#-port#-ALL Purpose Identify the DS1s where slot# = 4 to 10, port# =1 to 12 Identify the DS1s where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28 DS1 service module where port# = 1 to 84 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 All DS1 ports on the DS1 service module where hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4
DSM AID
DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-OC3hslot#-hport#
DS1-1-ALL-%HLINK-OC3hslot#-hport#
Example input
Delete the DS1 facility on the DS1 circuit pack in slot 4 port 7:
DLT-T1:NEWYORK:DS1-4-7:CTAG123;
Optical Metro 3500
DLT-T3
The Delete T3 command is used to eliminate a DS3 facility from a circuit pack; the DS3 facility provisioning information is deleted and all other information (errors, monitoring points) is ignored. Before you delete a facility, you must delete all connections on the facility, and put the facility OOS. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-T3:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 2-227 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. DS3s to act on. Correlation tag
Table 2-228 AID descriptions AID type T3 AID Command-specific Purpose values DS3-slot#-port# DS3-slot#-ALL Identify the T3 facilities slot# = 3, 5, 7, or 9 port# = 1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3VTx12
MS DS3-slot-port-%HLI slot = 3 or 5; port = 1 to 6 DSM T3 NK-Hline-HslotHline = OC3 or OC12 Facility Hport Hslot = 3 to10 AID Hport = 1 to 4 Example input
Delete the T3 facility on the DS3 circuit pack in slot 9 port 1 at the OTTAWA network element:
DLT-T3:OTTAWA:DS3-9-1:CTAG13;
DLT-UPGRD
The Delete Upgrade command is used to delete a release of a software load stored on the network processor. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
DLT-UPGRD:[TID]::CTAG::RELNO; Table 2-229 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG RELNO Example input Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag ASCII string identifying the release number to delete
Delete the software release REL0310D.TT on network processor OTTAWA:

DLT-UPGRD:OTTAWA::CTAG24::REL0310D.TT;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-ALM-PROFILE
The Edit Alarm Profile command allows the user to set the status of any alarms that are applicable to the specified profile. Security Level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-ALM-PROFILE:[TID]::CTAG::AIDTYPE,PRFLNAME:ALMID=Domain [,ALRMSTAT=Domain]; Table 2-230 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG AIDTYPE PRFLNAME ALMID ALRMSTAT Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Access identifier TYPE Alarm profile name assigned by user Alarm identifier Alarm status
Table 2-231 Parameter description Parameter AIDTYPE Possible values VT1 STS1 STS3C STS12C STS24C STS48C EQPT T1 T3 EC1 Description VT1 facility STS-1 facility STS-3C facility STS-12C facility STS-24C facility STS-48C facility equipment T1 facility T3 facility EC-1 facility
2-196 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-231 (continued) Parameter description Parameter AIDTYPE Possible values E1 OC3 OC12 OC48 OC192 FAC COM DSM SECU ETH WAN FC PRFLNAME ASCII string Description E1 facility OC-3 facility OC-12 facility OC-48 facility OC-192 facility conditions attributed to ILAN facilities conditions attributed to shelf or SP DS service module facility Security related Ethernet facility WAN facility Fibre Channel facility Alarm profile name-can be up to 20 characters long and must be enclosed within quotation marks (quotation marks and backslash to be excluded from name) Identifier of alarm point Enable selected alarms (default) Disable selected alarms
ALMID ALRMSTAT
a positive integer ENABLED DISABLED
Example input
Set the alarm status for network element OTTAWA:

ED-ALM-PROFILE:OTTAWA::CTAG12::OC3,ALARMSON: ALMID=12;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-BLSRRING
Use the Edit BLSR Ring command to change the name of a BLSR ring. This command is supported on the network processor. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-BLSRRING:[TID]:AID:CTAG::NEW_RINGNAME; Table 2-232 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier. Current ring name Correlation tag
NEW_RINGNAME New ring name Table 2-233 AID descriptions AID type Ring name Command-specific values Purpose
Table 2-234 Parameter descriptions Parameter AID Possible values Description
An alphanumeric string between 1 Current ring name and 20 characters
NEW_RINGNAME An alphanumeric string between 1 New ring name and 20 characters. Special characters are not supported. Example input
Change the name of the BLSR ring to OTTAWARING:

ED-BLSRRING:NPFGXOTT:RING1:CTAG::OTTAWARING;
ED-COMM
Use this command to edit the parameters of the RS232 communication port. Security level 1 Input syntax
ED-COMM:[tid]:aid:ctag::COMMTYPE:[STATUS=Domain]; Table 2-235 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
COMMTYPE Communication type STATUS Enable or disable the RS-232 communication port.
Response block syntax

ED-COMM::%HLINK-AID:CTAG:: RS232; Table 2-236 Parameter description Parameter Description Possible values
COMMTYPE Select to display RS232 communication port RS232 information. AID Single DSM MSP shelf or MS DSM Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4
Optical Metro 3500
ED-CRS-STS1
The Edit Cross-connect STS-1 command is used to edit the cross-connect type (CCT) of an existing STS-1 cross-connect. See Figure 4-1 on page 4-122 for descriptions of cross-connect types. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-CRS-STS1:[TID]:FromAID,ToAID:CTAG::[CCT]:[SWMATE=Domain] [,CKTID=Domain]; Table 2-237 Syntax definition Field TID FromAID Purpose Target identifier From access identifier. The STS-1 facility at one end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the FromAID specifies the signal source. To access identifier. The STS-1 facility at the other end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the ToAID specifies the signal destination. Correlation tag Cross-connection type Path protection Switch Mate. Path protection for the FromAID OC-3, OC-3x4, OC-12, OC-12x4 STS, OC-48, OC-48 STS, or OC-192 interface only when the CCT is protected. That is, when the CCT is one of 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR. Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect. Enclose the string in double quotes (for example, Toronto-Ottawa).
ToAID
CTAG CCT SWMATE
CKTID
2-200 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-238 AID descriptions AID type STS-1 Facility AID Command-specific values OC3-slot#-port#-sts# Purpose Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-3 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3, 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12, 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 to 12 Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-48 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1 to 48 Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 192 Identify the STS-1 facility on an EC-1 circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port# = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
EC1-slot#-port#
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-201 Table 2-238 (continued) AID descriptions AID type STS-1 Facility AID Command-specific values DS3-slot#-port# Purpose Identify the STS-1 facility on a DS3 circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, or 9 port# = 1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3/EC-1x12 Identify the STS-1 facility on the WAN port where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 for 2x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 3 for 4x100FX-P2Por 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 21 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P
2-202 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-238 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose
DS3-slot-port-%HLINK- slot = 3 or 5 STS1 Hline-Hslot-Hport Facility port = 1 to 6 AID on MS Hline = OC3 or OC12 DSM Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4 WAN-slot-port-sts%HLINK-Hline-HslotHport slot = 3 to 6; port = 1 to 8; sts = 1 to 3 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4 STSMDS1-grp%HLINK-Hline-HslotHport grp = 1 to 3 grp 1 =DS1s 1 to 28 grp 2 = DS1s 29 to 56 grp 3 = DS1s 57 to 84 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4 RPR AID IPTR-index# Identify the RPR where index# = 1 to 8
IPTR-index#-port#-sts# Identify the RPR, for RPRs that have virtual concatenation enabled, where index# = 1 to 8 port# = 1 or 2 sts# = 1 to 24 Table 2-239 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR IPTRING Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection (default) Unidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional bridge ring connection SONET bandwith allocation for RPR
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-203 Table 2-239 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter SWMATE Possible values OC3-slot#-port#-sts# Description Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-3 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3, 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12, 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 to 12 Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1 to 48 Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 192 Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect.
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
CKTID
1 to 40 alphanumeric characters
Example 1
Task
For the NEWYORK network element, edit (convert) an existing STS-1 1WAY cross-connect to a 2WAY cross-connect. The existing cross-connect has the following characteristics: FromAID = slot 7 DS3 mapper ToAID = slot 10 OC-3 interface, port 1, STS1 = 3
Solution
The ED-CRS-STS1 command requires two 1WAY cross-connects to be in place before a 1WAY to 2WAY edit. Consequently, a second 1WAY cross-connect must be entered with the following command before the ED-CRS-STS1 command can be issued:
ENT-CRS-STS1:NEWYORK:OC3-10-1-3,DS3-7-1:CTAG12::1WAY;
Now that the complementary 1WAY cross-connect exists, the two cross-connects can be converted into a single 2WAY cross-connect with the following command:
ED-CRS-STS1:NEWYORK:OC3-10-1-3,DS3-7-1:CTAG12::2WAY;
Example 2
Task
For the SEATTLE network element, edit an existing STS-1 2WAY cross-connect to a 2WAYPR cross-connect. The existing cross-connect has the following characteristics: FromAID = slot 9 port 2 OC-3 interface, STS1 = 1 ToAID = slot 5 port 1 DS3 mapper The switchmate for the resulting 2WAYPR cross-connect is to be STS1 #1 on the slot 10 port 2 optical interface.
Solution
The following command will edit the existing cross-connect as required:

ED-CRS-STS1:SEATTLE: OC3-9-2-1,DS3-5-1:CTAG12::2WAYPR:SWMATE=OC3-10-2-1;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-CRS-STS12C
The Edit Cross-connect STS-12c command is used to edit the cross-connect type (CCT) of an existing STS-12c cross-connect. See Figure 4-2 on page 4-123 for descriptions of cross-connect types. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-CRS-STS12C:[TID]:FromAID,ToAID:CTAG::[CCT]:[SWMATE=Domain] [,CKTID=Domain]; Table 2-240 Syntax definition Field TID FromAID Purpose Target identifier From access identifier. The STS-12c facility at one end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the FromAID specifies the signal source. To access identifier. The STS-12c facility at the other end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the ToAID specifies the signal destination. Correlation tag Cross-connection type Switchmate identifies the path protection for the FromAID when the CCT is path protected. That is, when the CCT is one of 1WAYPR or 2WAYPR. Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect. Enclose the string in double quotes (for example, Toronto-Ottawa).
ToAID
CTAG CCT SWMATE CKTID
2-206 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-241 AID descriptions AID type STS-12c Facility AID Command-specific values Purpose
OC12-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 OC48-slot#-sts# Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-48 circuit pack where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37 Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37, ... 181
OC192-slot#-sts#
WAN-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-12c facility on the WAN port of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 sts# = 1 Resilient Packet IPTR-index# Ring (RPR) Table 2-242 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values CCT 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR IPTRING Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection (default) Unidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional bridge ring connection SONET bandwith allocation for RPR Index# = 1 to 8
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-207 Table 2-242 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values SWMATE Description
OC12-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-12c facility where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12, 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 OC48-slot#-sts# Identify the STS-12c facility where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48, 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37 Identify the STS-12c facility where slot# = 11, 12, sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37, ... 181 Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect.
OC192-slot#-sts# CKTID 1 to 40 alphanumeric characters
Example 1
Task
For the NEWYORK network element, edit (convert) an existing STS-12c 1WAY cross-connect to a 2WAY cross-connect. The existing cross-connect has the following characteristics: FromAID = slot 7 OC-12 interface ToAID = slot 10 OC-12 interface
Solution
The ED-CRS-STS12C command requires two 1WAY cross-connects to be in place before a 1WAY to 2WAY edit. Consequently, a second 1WAY cross-connect must be entered with the following command before the ED-CRS-STS12C command can be issued:
ENT-CRS-STS12C:NEWYORK:OC12-10-1-1,OC12-7-1-1:CTAG12::1WAY;
Now that the complementary 1WAY cross-connect exists, the two cross-connects can be converted into an single 2WAY cross-connect with the following command:
ED-CRS-STS12C:NEWYORK:OC12-10-1-1,OC12-7-1-1:CTAG12::2WAY;
Example 2
Task
For the SEATTLE network element, edit an existing STS-12c 2WAY cross-connect to a 2WAYPR cross-connect. The existing cross-connect has the following characteristics: FromAID = slot 9 OC-12 interface ToAID = slot 5 OC-12 interface The switchmate for the resulting 2WAYPR cross-connect is to be the slot 10 optical interface.
Solution

ED-CRS-STS12C:SEATTLE: OC12-9-1-1,OC12-5-1-1:CTAG12::2WAYPR:SWMATE=OC12-10-1-1;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-CRS-STS24C
ToAID
CTAG CCT SWMATE
CKTID
2-210 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-244 AID descriptions AID type STS-24c Facility AID Command-specific values Purpose OC48-slot#-sts# Identify the STS-24c facility on an OC-48 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1, 25 Identify the STS-24c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 25, ... 169 Identify the STS-24c facility on the WAN port of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 sts# = 1
OC192-slot#-sts#
Table 2-245 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values CCT 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR SWMATE OC48-slot#-sts# Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection (default) Unidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional bridge ring connection Identify the STS-24c facility where slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1, 25 Identify the STS-24c facility where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 25, ... 169 Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect.
OC192-slot#-sts#
CKTID
Optical Metro 3500
Example 1
Task
For the NEWYORK network element, edit (convert) an existing STS-24c 1WAY cross-connect to a 2WAY cross-connect. The existing cross-connect has the following characteristics: FromAID = slot 7 OC-48 STS interface ToAID = slot 10 OC-48 STS interface
Solution
Example 2
Task
For the SEATTLE network element, edit an existing STS-24c 2WAY cross-connect to a 2WAYPR cross-connect. The existing cross-connect has the following characteristics: FromAID = slot 9 OC-48 STS interface ToAID = slot 5 OC-48 STS interface The switchmate for the resulting 2WAYPR cross-connect is to be the slot 10 optical interface.
Solution

ED-CRS-STS3C
ED-CRS-STS3C:[TID]:FromAID,ToAID:CTAG::[CCT]:[SWMATE=Domain] [,CKTID=Domain]; Table 2-246 Syntax definition Field TID FromAID Purpose Target identifier From access identifier. The facility at one end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the FromAID specifies the signal source. To access identifier. The facility at the other end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the ToAID specifies the signal destination. Correlation tag Cross-connection type Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect. Enclose the string in double quotes (for example, Toronto-Ottawa).
ToAID
CTAG CCT CKTID
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-213 Table 2-247 AID descriptions AID type STS-3c Facility AID Command-specific values OC3-slot#-port#-sts# Purpose Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-3 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4, sts# =1 Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, or 10 Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ...to 46 Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12, sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ...to 190 Identify the STS-3c facility on the WAN port where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 for 2x100BT-P2P, 4x100FX-P2P, or 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1, 4, 7, ... 19 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P Identify the STS-3c facility on the WAN port of the MS DSM where slot = 3 to 6; port = 1 to 8 sts = 1; Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10, Hport = 1 to 4 Identify the RPR where index# = 1 to 8
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
RPR AID
IPTR-index#
IPTR-index#-port#-sts# Identify the RPR, for RPRs that have virtual concatenation enabled, where index# = 1 to 8, port# = 1 or 2, sts# = 1 to 8
2-214 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-248 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR IPTRING SWMATE OC3-slot#-port#-sts# Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection (default) Unidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional bridge ring connection SONET bandwith allocation for RPR Identify the STS-3c facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# =1 Identify the STS-3c facility where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, or 10 Identify the STS-3c facility where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ...to 46 Identify the STS-3c facility where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ...to 190 Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect.
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
CKTID
Example 1
Task
For the NEWYORK network element, edit (convert) an existing STS-3c 1WAY cross-connect to a 2WAY cross-connect. The existing cross-connect has the following characteristics: FromAID = slot 7 OC-3 interface, port 1, STS-1 = 1 ToAID = slot 10 OC-3 interface, port 3, STS-1 = 1
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-215 Solution
Example 2
Task
For the SEATTLE network element, edit an existing STS-3c 2WAY cross-connect to a 2WAYPR cross-connect. The existing cross-connect has the following characteristics: FromAID = slot 9 OC-3 interface ToAID = slot 5 OC-3 interface The switchmate for the resulting 2WAYPR cross-connect is to be the slot 10 optical interface.
Solution

ED-CRS-STS48C
ToAID
CTAG CCT SWMATE CKTID
Table 2-250 AID descriptions AID type STS-48c Facility AID Command-specific values OC48-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-sts# Purpose slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 49, ... 145
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-217 Table 2-251 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR SWMATE OC48-slot#-sts# Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection (default) Unidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional bridge ring connection Identify the STS-48c facility where slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1 Identify the STS-48c facility where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 49, ... 145 Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect.
OC192-slot#-sts#
CKTID
Example 1
Task
For the NEWYORK network element, edit (convert) an existing STS-48c 1WAY cross-connect to a 2WAY cross-connect. The existing cross-connect has the following characteristics: FromAID = slot 7 OC-48 STS interface ToAID = slot 10 OC-48 STS interface
Solution
Now that the complementary 1WAY cross-connect exists, the two cross-connects can be converted into an single 2WAY cross-connect with the following command:
Example 2
Task
For the SEATTLE network element, edit an existing STS-48c 2WAY cross-connect to a 2WAYPR cross-connect. The existing cross-connect has the following characteristics: FromAID = slot 9 OC-48 STS interface ToAID = slot 5 OC-48 STS interface The switchmate for the resulting 2WAYPR cross-connect is to be the slot 10 optical interface.
Solution

Optical Metro 3500
ED-CRS-VT1
The Edit Cross-connect VT1.5command is used to edit the cross-connect type (CCT) of an existing VT1.5 cross-connect. See Figure 4-3 on page 4-124 for descriptions of cross-connect types. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-CRS-VT1:[TID]:FromAID,ToAID:CTAG::[CCT]:[SWMATE=Domain] [,CKTID=Domain]; Table 2-252 Syntax definition Field TID FromAID Purpose Target identifier From access identifier. The facility at one end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the FromAID specifies the signal source. To access identifier. The facility at the other end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the ToAID specifies the signal destination. Correlation tag Cross-connection type Path protection Switch Mate. Path protection for the FromAID OC-3, OC-3x4, OC-12 or OC-48 interface only when the CCT is protected. That is, when the CCT is one of 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR. Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect. Enclose the string in double quotes (for example, Toronto-Ottawa).
ToAID
CTAG CCT SWMATE
CKTID
2-220 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-253 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose slot# = 4 to 10 port# = 1 to 12 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28 port# = 1 to 84 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 grp# = 1 to 3 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 MS DSM port# = 1 to 84, Hline = OC3 or OC12, Hslot# = 3 to 10, Hport# = 1 to 4 MS DSM grp# = 1 to 3, Hline = OC3 or OC12, Hslot# = 3 to 10, Hport# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 sts# = 1 to 12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 48 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4
VT1.5 DS1-slot#-port# facility AID DS1-slot#-port#-t1# DS1-slot#-port#-ALL DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-OC3-hslot# -hport# DS1-1-DFLT-grp#-%HLINK-OC3hslot#-hport# DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-HlineHslot#-Hport#
DS1-DFLT-grp#-%HLINK-HlineHslot#-Hport#
OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt# OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-ALL OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL
OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt# OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-ALL OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL
OC48-slot#-sts#-vtg#-vt# OC48-slot#-sts#-vtg#-ALL OC48-slot#-sts#-ALL
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-221 Table 2-253 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port # = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port # = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 for sts# = 1 or 2 vtg# = 1 or 2 for sts# = 3 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 6, port# = 1 to 8, sts# = 1 to 3, vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4, Hline = OC3 or OC12, Hslot# = 3 to 10, Hport# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 8 sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 for sts# = 1 or 2 vtg# = 1 or 2 for sts# = 3 vt# = 1 to 4 grp# = 1 to 3
VT1.5 EC1-slot#-port#-vtg#-vt# facility AID EC1-slot#-port#-vtg#-ALL EC1-slot#-port#-ALL
WAN-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt#%HLINK-Hline#-Hslot#-Hport# WAN-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL%HLINK-Hline#-Hslot#-Hport# MS DSM WAN facilities WAN-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt#%HLINK-Hline#-Hslot#-Hport# WAN-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-ALL%HLINK-Hline#-Hslot#-Hport# WAN-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL%HLINK-Hline#-Hslot#-Hport# SMART AID DS1-DFLT-grp#
Use the DFLT-# smart AID to edit the CCT for one of three sets of 28 DS1s to VT1.5s within an STS-1. For each possible DFLT-# value, a specific set of 28 ports is cross-connected to an STS-1. Table 2-254 shows the DFLT-# smart AID value and the corresponding ports.
Table 2-254 DFLT-# smart AID values DFLT-# 1 2 3 Ports 1 to 28 29 to 56 57 to 84 Equivalent facilities DS1-4-1 DS1-6-4 DS1-6-5 DS1-8-8 DS1-8-9 DS1-10-12
2-222 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-255 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values CCT 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR SWMATE OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-ALL OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection (default) Unidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional bridge ring connection slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4
OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt# slot# = 3 to 12 OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-ALL port# = 1 sts# = 1 to 12 OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 OC48-slot#-sts#-vtg#-vt# OC48-slot#-sts#-vtg#-ALL OC48-slot#-sts#-ALL CKTID slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 48 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4
1 to 40 alphanumeric characters Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect.
Example 1
Task
For the NEWYORK network element, edit (convert) an existing VT1.5 1WAY cross-connect to a 2WAY cross-connect. The existing cross-connect has the following characteristics: FromAID = slot 7 DS1 mapper, port 2 ToAID = slot 9 OC-3 interface, port 3, STS1 = 3, VTG = 1, VT =1
Solution
The ED-CRS-VT1 command requires two 1WAY cross-connects to be in place before a 1WAY to 2WAY edit. Consequently, a second 1WAY cross-connect must be entered with the following command before the ED-CRS-VT1 command can be issued:
ENT-CRS-VT1:NEWYORK:OC3-9-3-3-1-1,DS1-7-2:CTAG12::1WAY; Optical Metro 3500 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
ED-CRS-VT1:NEWYORK:OC3-9-3-3-1-1,DS1-7-2:CTAG12::2WAY;
Example 2
Task
For the SEATTLE network element, edit an existing VT1 2WAY cross-connect to a 2WAYPR cross-connect. The existing cross-connect has the following characteristics: FromAID = slot 9 OC-3 interface, port 2, STS1 = 3, VTG = 3, VT = 1 ToAID = slot 5 DS1 mapper, port 12 The required switchmate for the resulting 2WAYPR cross-connect is the slot 10 optical interface.
Solution

ED-CRS-VT1:SEATTLE: OC3-9-2-3-3-1,DS1-5-12:CTAG12::2WAYPR:SWMATE=OC3-10-2-3-3-1;
ED-DAT
The Edit Date command instructs the network element or network processor to change its system date and time clock to the value specified. The date and time are set up on the network element as part of commissioning, and on the network processor when the network processor is initially provisioned. The date and time must be reset after a system power-up. Note: The date and time on the network processor synchronizes to that of the selected shelf processor. Security level Level 4 Input syntax
ED-DAT:[TID]::CTAG::[date],[time];

Table 2-256 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG DATE TIME Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Current date. A null value for DATE leaves the date unchanged. Current time. A null value for TIME leaves the time unchanged.
Table 2-257 Parameter descriptions Parameter DATE Format Description
YY-MM-DD YY is the last two digits of the year ranging from 00 to 99, MM is the month of the year ranging from 01 to 12, and DD is the day of the month ranging from 01 to 31. HH-MM-SS HH is the hour ranging from 00 to 23, MM is the minute ranging from 00 to 59, and SS is the second ranging from 00 to 59.
TIME
Example input
Set the date and time on the network element to April 15, 1995, 9:30 a.m.:
ED-DAT:NEWYORK::CTAG12::95-04-15,09-30-00;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-DFLT-AINS
Use the Edit default auto-in-service command to modify the default DS1 or DS3 auto-in-service (AINS) start-up time for a shelf. When the secondary state of a DS1 or DS3 facility is set to auto-in-service (using the ED-T1/T3 or ENT-T1/T3 commands), and the start-up time parameter (HH-MM) is not entered, HH-MM assumes the default start-up time. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-DFLT-AINS:[TID]::CTAG::[AINS-TIME]; Table 2-258 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG AINS-TIME Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Auto-in-service start-up time
Table 2-259 Parameter descriptions Parameter AINS-TIME Possible values HH-MM 00-01 to 96-00 Description Default = 04-00 (4 hours) Amount of time that an error-free signal must be present on the DS1 or DS3 line in order for the auto-in-service state to clear. If an error-free signal is present for less than this period of time, the DS1 or DS3 facility remains in an auto-in-service state. HH= 00-96 hours MM=00-59 minutes Example input
For the SEATTLE network element, set the default AINS start-up time to 7 hours and 30 minutes:
ED-DFLT-AINS:SEATTLE::CTAG04::07-30;
ED-EC1
The Edit EC-1 command is used to edit the line buildout and auto in-service parameters of an EC-1 facility. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-EC1:[TID]:AID:CTAG:::[LBO=Domain]:,[SST]; Table 2-260 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LBO SST Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. EC-1 facility to act on. Correlation tag Line buildout Secondary state
Example input
At the EC-1 facility in slot 5 port 3 of network element SEATTLE, edit the line buildout to 300 feet:
ED-EC1:SEATTLE:EC1-5-3:CTAG04:::LBO=2;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-ETH
Use the Edit Ethernet command to edit the parameters of an Ethernet facility. Note: When auto-negotiation is disabled on the Optical Metro 3500, the customer data equipment must also have auto-negotiation disabled. Security level Level 3 Input syntax for the 2x100BT-P2P
ED-ETH:[tid]:aid:ctag:::[,ETHDPX=Domain] [,SPEED=Domain][,PASSCTRL=Domain];
Input syntax for the 8x100BT-P2P and 8x100BT MS DSM

ED-ETH:[tid]:aid:ctag:::[AN=Domain][,SPEED=Domain] [,PASSCTRL=Domain][,FLOWCTRL=Domain][,PAUSETX=Domain] [,MTU=Domain][,TXCON=Domain][,PAUSETXOVERRIDE=Domain];
Input syntax for the 4x100FX-P2P

ED-ETH:[tid]:aid:ctag:::[,PASSCTRL=Domain][,PAUSETX=Domain] [,MTU=Domain][,TXCON=Domain];
Input syntax for the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, and 2xGigE-P2P

ED-ETH:[tid]:aid:ctag:::[AN=Domain][,PASSCTRL=Domain] [,FLOWCTRL=Domain][,PAUSETX=Domain][,MTU=Domain] [,TXCON=Domain][,PAUSETXOVERRIDE=Domain]; Table 2-261 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG AN ETHDPX SPEED PASSCTRL FLOWCTRL PAUSETX Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The Ethernet facility to edit. Correlation tag Auto negotiation Duplex setting Speed Control frames setting Advertised flow control capabilities Pause frame transmission
2-228 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-261 (continued) Syntax definition Field MTU TXCON PAUSETXOVERRIDE Table 2-262 AID descriptions AID type ETH AID Command-specific values Purpose ETH-slot#-port# ETH-slot#-ALL Identify the Ethernet facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 or 2 for all other circuit packs Identify the MS DSM Ethernet facility where slot# = 3 to 6 port# = 1 to 8 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot# = 3 to10 Hport# = 1 to 4 Purpose Maximum transfer unit Transmit conditioning Pause frame transmission override
MS DSM Ethernet Facility
ETH-slot#-port#-%HLINKHline-Hslot#-Hport#
Table 2-263 Parameter descriptions Parameter AN Possible values ENABLE (default) DISABLE Description Enable or disable auto-negotiation. When auto-negotiation is disabled, the customer data equipment must also have auto-negotiation disabled. Set the duplex mode to Half, Full, or Both. Make sure the device connected to the ETH port has the same duplex setting.
ETHDPX
HALF FULL (default) BOTH
SPEED
10 (default) 100 10/100
Set the speed of the port to 10, 100, or 10/100 Mbit/s. For the 2x100BT-P2P card, since auto-negotiation is not supported, the 10/100 setting is equivalent to 100. Make sure the device connected to the port has the same speed.
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-229 Table 2-263 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter PASSCTRL Possible values ENABLE DISABLE (default) Description Discard pause frames received on the port (disable) or allow pause frames to transparently pass through (enable). Note that this attribute applies to pass control frames of type 0x8808 only (PAUSE is the only defined control frame). Other pass control frames (for example, type 0x8809) are not affected by this attribute, and will always be transparently passed through. Note: If pause frame transmission (PAUSETX) is enabled, the PASSCTRL attribute should be disabled to avoid flow control problems between the ETH port and subtending equipment. FLOWCTRL ASYM (default) SYM NONE PAUSETX ENABLE (default) DISABLE Set the flow control capability used by auto negotiation to ASYM, SYM or NONE. Auto negotiation sets the actual flow control between two devices. Note that if auto negotiation is disabled, this attribute is ignored. Enable or disable transmission of pause frames. If auto negotiation is enabled, this parameter only applies if PAUSETXOVERRIDE is also enabled. Set the maximum frame size (in bytes) that this port can transmit. This size includes all the overhead bytes such as MAC addresses, length and CRCs. 1594 is not supported by GE/FC SFP.
MTU
1594 1600 (default) 9600
2-230 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-263 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter TXCON Possible values ENABLE (default) DISABLE Description Enable or disable shut down of the transmit signal of the Ethernet port upon detection of certain Ethernet or WAN port defects. You can only edit this parameter if the ETH facility is out-of-service (OOS-MA). If enabled, the transmit signal of the port shuts down when any of the following occur: there are client signal failures received from the far-end; there is a link down condition on the corresponding WAN port; the corresponding WAN port receives client signal failures; or there are no cross-connects on the corresponding WAN port. In addition: client signal failures received from the far-end cause ingress frames at the ETH port to be discarded and egress frames on the WAN ports to be discarded link down conditions on the ETH port trigger transmission of client signal failures to the WAN port client signal failures from the WAN port trigger a Far End Client Rx Signal Failure alarm If disabled, the transmit signal of the port does not shut down if any of the conditions listed above occur. In addition, an ETH link down condition does not trigger transmission of client signal failures to the WAN port and client signal failures from the WAN port do not trigger a Far End Client Rx Signal Failure alarm. Note 1: If TXCON is disabled, the GFP CSF client management frame transmission will also be disabled with local client failures. If this occurs, incoming WAN traffic will cause LAN OMs to increment. However, frames will be silently discarded whether auto-negotiation is enabled or disabled. Note 2: If TXCON is disabled, the Gigabit Ethernet laser will remain off even when no cross-connects are assigned against the WAN port.
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-231 Table 2-263 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter PAUSETX OVRRIDE Possible values ENABLE DISABLE (default) Description If auto-negotiation is enabled and PAUSETXOVRRIDE = ENABLE: Pause frames are generated by the port and sent in the egress direction when PAUSETX = Enable, and not generated when PAUSETX = Disable, regardless of the outcome of the auto-negotiation process. If auto-negotiation is enabled and PAUSETXOVRRIDE = DISABLE: The port abides with the negotiated pause transmission setting. When auto-negotiation is disabled, the PAUSETXOVRRIDE setting is ignored. REMOTE LPBK ALLOW Set to ALLOWED or BLOCKED for remote loopback requests. You can edit this BLOCKED (default) parameter even if the port is In-Service (IS). Note 1: If you set the parameter LPBKTYPE to REMOTE with the command OPR-LPBK-ETH, the near-end node will send a loopback request every 500ms. A node with REMOTELPBK set to ALLOWED that receives a loopback request will apply a terminal loopback. This will cause the "Remotely Activated Loopback Active" alarm to be raised. Note 2: Failure to receive a loopback request for 3 seconds will deactivate any remotely activated loopback and clear the corresponding alarm. This will cause the Remote Loopback Requested alarm to be raised and will clear the Remote Loopback Active alarm (if previously raised). Note 3: If you set the LPBKTYPE parameter to REMOTE when the far-end node does not support the remote loopback feature, or has REMOTELPBK set to BLOCKED, a Remote loopback Requested alarm will be raised. You can clear this alarm by setting REMOTELPBK to ALLOWED at the far-end node (if supported). If this occurs, the Remote Loopback Active alarm will be raised. Example input
Change the duplex mode on ETH port 1 of the 2x100BT-P2P circuit pack in slot 7 of network element OTTAWA to HALF (do not change other settings):
ED-ETH:OTTAWA:ETH-7-1:CTAG01:::ETHDPX=HALF;
ED-FC
Use the Edit Fibre Channel command to edit the parameters of a Fibre Channel facility (FC port) on the GE/FC SFP of a 2xGigE/FC-P2P or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C circuit pack. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-FC:<tid>:<aid>:<ctag>:::[,SUBRATE=Domain][,EXTREACH=Domain] [,SERVICE=Domain][,BBCOVERRIDE=Domain][,COMPRESSION=Domain]; Table 2-264 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SUBRATE EXTREACH SERVICE BBCOVERRIDE COMPRESSION Table 2-265 AID descriptions AID type FC AID Command-specific values Purpose FC-slot#-port# FC-slot#-ALL Identify the Fibre Channel facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The Fibre Channel facility to provision. Correlation tag Determines whether or not service is carried over sub-rate bandwidth Extended reach mode of operation Type of service Buffer-to-buffer credit (BBC) override value Allows compression. Applies only to the 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C.
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-233 Table 2-266 Parameter descriptions Parameter SUBRATE Possible values ENABLE DISABLE (default) Description Enable or disable the ability of the service to be carried over sub-rate bandwidth. Must be of the same value as EXTREACH. Enable or disable the extended reach mode of operation. Must be of the same value as SUBRATE. Set the service mode to FC100 or FICON. Set the buffer-to-buffer credit (BBC) override to 0 (no override), 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 or 256. Note that if EXTREACH is disabled, this attribute and the selected value are ignored.
EXTREACH
ENABLE DISABLE (default)
SERVICE
FC100 (default) FICON
BBCOVERRIDE
0 (default) 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 ENABLE DISABLE (default)
COMPRESSION
Enable or disable the compression mode of operation. Applicable only for the 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C.
Example input
Change the service mode on FC port 1 of the GE/FC SFP of a 2xGigE/FC-P2P circuit pack in slot 7 of network element OTTAWA to FICON:
ED-FC:OTTAWA:FC-7-1:CTAG01:::SERVICE=FICON;
ED-FFP-OC12
The Edit FFP OC-12 command is used to edit the attributes of the OC-12 1+1 line protection group. Note 1: Ensure facilities on the protection circuit pack are out of service. Note 2: You cannot execute this command if there is an active test access session on this facility. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-FFP-OC12:[TID]:workingOC12AID,protectionOC12AID:CTAG::: [PSDIRN=Domain]; Table 2-267 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG PSDIRN Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. OC-12 facility to act on. Correlation tag Direction of protection group for OC-12 lines: UNI (unidirectional) or BI (bidirectional). Default is UNI.
Table 2-268 AID descriptions AID type working OC-12 AID Command-specific values Purpose OC12-slot#-port# Identify the slot number of the working OC-12 facility slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9, or 11 for OC-12 slot# = 3, 5, 7, or 9 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS Identify the slot number of the protection OC-12 facility slot# = 4, 6, 8, 10, or 12 for OC-12 slot# = 4, 6, 8, or 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS
OC12-slot#-port#
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-235 Table 2-269 Parameter descriptions Parameter PSDIRN Possible values UNI BI Example input Description Unidirectional (default) Bidirectional
Edit 1+1 protection for the OC-12 facility in slot 7 port 1 and slot 8 port 1 to be bidirectional:
ED-FFP-OC12:SEATTLE:OC12-7-1,OC12-8-1:CTAG13:::PSDIRN=BI;
ED-FFP-OC192
The Edit FFP OC-192 command is used to edit the attributes of the OC-192 line protection group. Note 1: Ensure facilities on the protection circuit pack are out of service. Note 2: You cannot execute this command if there is an active test access session on this facility. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-FFP-OC192:[TID]:workingOC192AID,protectionOC192AID:CTAG::: [PSDIRN=Domain][,WR=Domain]; Table 2-270 Syntax definition Field TID workingOC192AID protectionOC192AID CTAG PSDIRN WR Purpose Target identifier Working side access identifier. OC-192 facility to act on. Protection side access identifier. OC-192 facility to act on. Correlation tag Protection switch direction for 1+1 linear systems Wait-to-restore period for BLSR systems
Table 2-271 AID descriptions AID type working OC-192 AID Command-specific Purpose values OC192-slot# Identify the slot number of the working OC-192 where slot# = 11 Identify the slot number of the protection OC-192 where slot# = 12
OC192-slot#
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-237 Table 2-272 Parameter descriptions Parameter PSDIRN Possible values UNI BI WR n-MIN INFINITE Description Unidirectional switch for 1+1 linear systems (default) Bidirectional switch for 1+1 linear systems Wait-to-restore period for BLSR systems (in minutes, or infinite for no time limit). n = an integer between 1 and 12. Default is 5-MIN.
Example input
Edit 1+1 protection for the OC-192 facility in slots 11and 12 to be bidirectional:
ED-FFP-OC192:SEATTLE:OC192-11,OC192-12:CTAG13:::PSDIRN=BI;
ED-FFP-OC3
The Edit FFP OC-3 command is used to edit the attributes of the OC-3 1+1 line protection group. Note 1: Ensure facilities on the protection circuit pack are out of service. Note 2: You cannot execute this command if there is an active test access session on this facility. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-FFP-OC3:[TID]:workingOC3AID,protectionOC3AID:CTAG::: [PSDIRN=Domain]; Table 2-273 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG PSDIRN Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. OC-3 facility to act on. Correlation tag Direction of protection group for OC-3 lines: UNI (unidirectional) or BI (bidirectional). Default is UNI.
Table 2-274 AID descriptions AID type working OC3 AID protection OC3 AID Command-specific Purpose values OC3-slot#-port# Identify the slot number of the working OC-3 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 for OC-3, 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 Identify the slot number of the protection OC-3 slot# = 4, 6, 8, 10 port# = 1 for OC-3, 1 to 4 for OC-3x4
OC3-slot#-port#
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-239 Table 2-275 Parameter descriptions Parameter PSDIRN Possible values UNI BI Example input Description Unidirectional (default) Bidirectional
Edit 1+1 protection for the OC-3 facility in slot 5 port 1 and slot 6 port 1 to be bidirectional:
ED-FFP-OC3:SEATTLE:OC3-5-1,OC3-6-1:CTAG13:::PSDIRN=BI;
ED-FFP-OC48
The Edit FFP OC-48 command is used to edit the attributes of the OC-48 line protection group. Note 1: Ensure facilities on the protection circuit pack are out of service. Note 2: You cannot execute this command if there is an active test access session on this facility. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-FFP-OC48:[TID]:workingOC48AID,protectionOC48AID:CTAG::: [PSDIRN=Domain][,WR=Domain]; Table 2-276 Syntax definition Field TID workingOC48AID protectionOC48AID CTAG PSDIRN WR Purpose Target identifier Working side access identifier. OC-48 facility to act on. Protection side access identifier. OC-48 facility to act on. Correlation tag Protection switch direction for 1+1 linear systems Wait-to-restore period for BLSR systems
Table 2-277 AID descriptions AID type working OC-48 AID Command-specific Purpose values OC48-slot# Identify the slot number of the working OC-48 facility where slot# = 11 for OC-48 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9, or 11 for OC-48 STS Identify the slot number of the protection OC-48 facility where slot# = 12 for OC-48 slot# = 4, 6, 8, 10, or 12 for OC-48 STS
protection OC-48 AID OC48-slot#
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-241 Table 2-278 Parameter descriptions Parameter PSDIRN Possible values UNI BI WR n-MIN INFINITE Description Unidirectional switch for 1+1 linear systems (default) Bidirectional switch for 1+1 linear systems Wait-to-restore period for BLSR systems (in minutes, or infinite for no time limit). n = an integer between 1 and 12. Default is 5-MIN.
Example input
Edit 1+1 protection for the OC-48 facility in slots 11and 12 to be bidirectional:
ED-FFP-OC48:SEATTLE:OC48-11,OC48-12:CTAG13:::PSDIRN=BI;
ED-IP
The Edit IP command is used to edit the IP address and associated parameters assigned to the COLAN on the NP. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-IP:[TID]::CTAG::[IPADDR]:[NETMASK=Domain][,GATEWAY=Domain] [,BCASTADDR=Domain]; Table 2-279 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG IPADDR Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag The unique IP address to assign the COLAN on the NP. The IP address must be in standard dot notation (n.n.n.n) where 0 n 255, for example, 47.215.37.65 COLAN network mask COLAN default gateway
NETMASK GATEWAY
BCASTADDR COLAN broadcast address Table 2-280 Parameter descriptions Parameter NETMASK Valid value Class A: 255.n.n.n Class B: 255.255.n.n Class C: 255.255.255.n Class D: 255.255.255.n Class E: 255.255.255.n 0.0.0.0 (default) n.n.n.n Description COLAN network mask. Value 0.0.0.0 means that the network mark is assigned automatically by the NP, based on the network class of the IP address. (default) 0.0.0.0 COLAN default gateway. Router for packets with unknown destination. Value 0.0.0.0 deletes the currently provisioned gateway. COLAN broadcast address. Value 0.0.0.0 means the broadcast address is assigned automatically by the NP based on the IP address.
GATEWAY
BCASTADDR 0.0.0.0 (default) n.n.n.n
Example input
Change the COLAN IP address and default gateway:

ED-IP:OC3IP::CTAG45::47.215.37.65; ED-IP:OC3IP::CTAG45::47.215.37.65:GATEWAY=47.215.0.1; Optical Metro 3500 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
ED-LLSDCC
The Edit Lower Layer SDCC command is used to modify editable layer 2 parameters of the section data communications channel (SDCC) link. When the SDCC link is provisioned, default values are set for these parameters. Execute the edit command at the far end first since all edit commands cause the link to drop and be reestablished. You can edit up to nine parameters in one command. The order of the parameters is unimportant. Separate each parameter with a comma. Note: You cannot edit the SDCC link on OCn facilities related to the DSM. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-LLSDCC:[TID]:AID:CTAG:::[L2INFO=Domain][,L2REX=Domain] [,L2WAIT=Domain][,L2NOA=Domain][,L2IF=Domain][,L2TEI=Domain] [,L2SAPI=Domain][,L2TS=Domain][,L2SIDE=Domain]; Table 2-281 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG L2INFO L2REX L2WAIT L2NOA L2IF L2TEI L2SAPI L2TS L2SIDE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The equipment to act on. Correlation tag Layer 2 frame size Layer 2 retransmission count Layer 2 waiting acknowledgement timer Layer 2 no activity timer Layer 2 outstanding I frame count Layer 2 terminal endpoint identifier Layer 2 service access point identifier Layer 2 transfer type Layer 2 user side / network side roles
2-244 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-282 AID descriptions AID type OC-3 AID Command-specific values Purpose OC3-slot#-port# Identify the OC-3 where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 Identify the OC-12 where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS Identify the OC-48 where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS Identify the OC-192 where slot# = 11 or 12 Identify the EC-1 where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9, port# = 1 to 3
OC-12 AID
OC12-slot#-port#
OC-48 AID OC-192 AID EC-1 AID
OC48-slot#
OC192-slot# EC1-slot#-port#
Note: SDCC is not supported on EC-1x12 circuit packs Table 2-283 Parameter descriptions Parameter L2INFO L2REX Possible values Description 512 to 1492 2 to 16 The frame size in bytes (default is 1304 bytes) The retransmission count (default is 3) Although there is no requirement to make this value the same at both ends, it is advisable to do so to improve performance. L2WAIT 2 to 200 The waiting acknowledgment timer, in tenths of a second (default is 2) Although there is no requirement to make this value the same at both ends, it is advisable to do so to improve performance. L2NOA 4 to 120 The no activity timer, in seconds (default is 10) Although there is no requirement to make this value the same at both ends, it is advisable to do so to improve performance.
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-245 Table 2-283 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter L2IF Possible values Description 1 to 127 The outstanding I-frame count (default is 7) Although there is no requirement to make this value the same at both ends, it is advisable to do so to improve performance. L2TEI 0 to 127 The terminal endpoint identifier (default is 0) Make the change at both ends as a new value gives the channel a new address. Make the change at the far end first, because when the first change is made, the channel state becomes down, and association with the far end is lost. L2SAPI 0 to 63 The Service Access Point Identifier (default is 62) Make the change at both ends as a new value gives the channel a new address. Make the change at the far end first, because when the first change is made, the channel state becomes down, and association with the far end is lost. L2TS AITS UITS L2SIDE USER NETWORK AUTO The transfer type. The default is AITS (acknowledged information transfer service). UITS (unacknowledged information transfer service) is not supported in this release. The role of the local node, network or user. The default value is Auto. The local node attempts to establish a connection with the far end by toggling its role between network and user in a random pattern. Setting this parameter to auto simplifies the setup of the link since the nodes decide which node is user and which is network. It does not matter which node has which role, as long as the two connecting nodes have opposite roles. Example input
Change the retransmission count from the default value:

ED-LLSDCC:WASHINGTON:OC3-11-1:CTAG23:::L2REX=5;
Change the no activity timer to 100 seconds, the frame size to 1492 bytes and the terminal endpoint identifier to 25:
ED-LLSDCC:WASHINGTON:OC3-11-1:CTAG23:::L2NOA=100, L2INFO=1492,L2TEI=25;
ED-LLX25
The Edit Lower Level X.25 command is used to edit the common parameters for all virtual circuits (VC) on the X.25 LAPB level. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-LLX25:[TID]::CTAG:::[T1=Domain][,T3=Domain][,N1=Domain] [,N2=Domain][,K=Domain][,MODULUS=Domain]; Table 2-284 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG T1 T3 N1 N2 K MODULUS Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Acknowledgment timer Link inactivity timer Maximum length of I frame Maximum number of retransmissions Window size for transmitter Sequence number range
Table 2-285 Parameter descriptions Parameter T1 T3 N1 N2 K Possible values 500 to 10000 ms (default 500) Description Acknowledgment timer (500 ms increment)
10000 to 300000 ms Link inactivity timer (500 ms increment) (default 30000) 1080 to 16440 bits (default 1080) 1 to 30 (default 30) 1 to 7 or 1 to 127 (default 7) Maximum length of an I frame in bits (increments of 8) Maximum number of retransmissions Window size for the transmitter based on LLX25 MODULUS value Sequence number range
MODULUS 8 or 128 (default 8) Example input
Modify the T3 and the N2 parameters:

ED-LLX25:OC3NP::CTAG45:::T3=20000,N2=20; Optical Metro 3500 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
ED-NETYPE
Use the Edit Network Element Type command to update the network element to support add/drop multiplexer capabilities for ring configurations. See RTRV-NETYPE (SP host) for more details. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-NETYPE:[TID]::CTAG:::NETYPE=Domain; Table 2-286 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG NETYPE Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Type of network element supported
Table 2-287 Parameter descriptions Parameter NETYPE Possible values Description TERMINAL Not supported
ADM
Used when a shelf processor is replaced with a extended shelf processor. The network element can be set to add/drop multiplexer (ADM) functionality for ring configurations.
Example input
Set add/drop multiplexer capabilities for the network element NEWYORK:

ED-NETYPE:NEWYORK::CTAG42:::NETYPE=ADM;
ED-OC12
The Edit OC12 command is used to set the signal degrade threshold (SDTH) for OC-12 facilities. The signal degrade threshold determines the bit error rate (BER) in a received OC-12 signal at which an autonomous protection switch occurs. an autonomous linear protection switch occurs between two 1+1 linear protected OC-12 facilities. (OC-12 facilities are provisioned for 1+1 linear protection with the ENT-FFP-OC12 command. See page 3-51 for more information on the ENT-FFP-OC12 command.) an autonomous protection switch occurs between two path-protected (switchmate) OC-12 facilities. (Path protection occurs either at the STS-3c, STS-1, or VT1.5 levels. To provision path protection, see the ED-CRS-xx or ENT-CRS-xx commands). Provisioning the SDTH parameter on an optical interface provisions the SDTH for the line and for all signals (STS-3c, STS-1, VT1.5) on that line. The Edit OC-12 command is also used to edit section trace parameters and SS Bits parameters. By default, the value of SS Bits is SONET but it can also be set to SDH. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-OC12:[TID]:AID:CTAG:::[SDTH=Domain][,STFORMAT=Domain] [,STRC=Domain][,EXPSTRC=Domain][,STFMODE=Domain] [,SSBITMDE=Domain]:,[SST]; Table 2-288 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SDTH Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. Identifies an OC-12 facility. Correlation tag Signal degrade threshold, bit error level at which a linear autonomous protection switch takes place. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Section trace format. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Outgoing section trace message. See Parameter descriptions table for details.
STFORMAT STRC
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-249 Table 2-288 (continued) Syntax definition Field EXPSTRC STFMODE SSBITMDE SST Table 2-289 AID descriptions AID type OC-12 Facility AID Command-specific values OC12-slot#-port# Purpose Identify the OC-12 facility where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS Purpose Expected section trace message. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Section trace fail mode. See Parameter descriptions table for details. SS bits mode. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Secondary state. See Parameter descriptions table for details.
MS DSM AID
OC12-slot-1-%HLINK-OC12- Identify a single MS DSM Hslot-Hport termination module, where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
Table 2-290 Parameter descriptions Parameter SDTH Possible values Description 5 to 9 Translates to 10-5 to 10-9 (default is 6) Section trace message is 1 byte long (default) Section trace message is up to 15 bytes long if STFORMAT is NUM (default is 1) if STFORMAT is STRING (default is null character string). See Note 1. if STFORMAT is NUM (default is 1) if STFORMAT is STRING (default is null character string). See Note 1.
STFORMAT NUM STRING STRC 0 to 255 ASCII string up to 15 characters EXPSTRC 0 to 255 ASCII string up to 15 characters
2-250 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-290 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter STFMODE Possible values Description OFF ALMONLY LINEFAIL SSBITMDE SONET SDH SST AINS AINS-DEA TS TS-DEA Alarms off, no traffic protection (default) Alarms on, no traffic protection Alarms on, with traffic protection. See Notes 2 and 3. SS bits operate in SONET mode (default) SS bits operate in SDH mode Auto in-service Auto in-service deactivated Test. See Note 4. Test Deactivated
Note 1: The Possible values of the section trace messages depend on the STFORMAT value. If STFORMAT is NUM, the Possible values are 0 to 255. If STFORMAT is STRING, the Possible values are any printable alphanumeric ASCII string up to 15 characters (except comma, colon, semi-colon, equal sign, or question mark) or a NULL character string (for example, STRC=, or EXPSTRC=,). Enclose the ASCII string in double quotes () to maintain case sensitivity. The string must begin and end with the double quotes. You cannot use double quotes, or any special character, as part of the ASCII string. Note 2: If STFMODE is currently set to LINEFAIL, you cannot modify the values of STFORMAT, STRC, or EXPSTRC, unless you also change STFMODE to OFF or ALMONLY in the same command. Note 3: STFMODE can only be changed to LINEFAIL if the values of STFORMAT, STRC, and EXPSTRC are not being changed in the same command. Note 4: Test access secondary state is supported in slots 3 to 10 only. Example input
At the NEWYORK network element, set the SDTH for the OC-12 facility in slot 7 port 1 to 10-7 errors per second and the STFMODE to LINEFAIL and the SSBITMDE to SONET:
ED-OC12:NEWYORK:OC12-7-1:CTAG23:::SDTH=7,STFMODE=LINEFAIL, SSBITMDE=SONET;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-OC192
The Edit OC-192 command is used to set the signal degrade threshold (SDTH) for OC-192 facilities. The signal degrade threshold determines the bit error rate (BER) in a received OC-192 signal at which an autonomous protection switch occurs. An autonomous linear protection switch occurs between two 1+1 linear protected OC-192 facilities. (OC-192 facilities are provisioned for 1+1 linear protection with the ENT-FFP-OC192 command. See page 3-53 for more information on the ENT-FFP-OC192 command.) The Edit OC-192 command is also used to edit section trace parameters and SS Bits parameters. By default, the value of SS Bits is SONET but it can also be set to SDH. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-OC192:[TID]:AID:CTAG:::[SDTH=Domain][,STFORMAT=Domain] [,STRC=Domain][,EXPSTRC=Domain][,STFMODE=Domain] [,SSBITMDE=Domain]:,[SST]; Table 2-291 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SDTH Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. Identifies an OC-192 facility. Correlation tag Signal degrade threshold, bit error level at which a linear autonomous protection switch takes place. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Section trace format. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Outgoing section trace value. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Expected incoming section trace value. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Section trace fail mode. See Parameter descriptions table for details. SS bit mode for optical signal. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Secondary state. See Parameter descriptions table for details.
STFORMAT STRC EXPSTRC STFMODE SSBITMDE SST
2-252 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-292 AID descriptions AID type OC-192 Facility AID Command-specific values OC192-slot# Purpose Identify the OC-192 facility where slot# = 11,12
Table 2-293 Parameter descriptions Parameter SDTH Possible values 5 to 9 Description Translates to 10-5 to 10-9 (default is 6) Integer 1 byte long (default) Section trace message is up to 15 bytes long If STFORMAT is NUM (default is 1)
STFORMAT NUM STRING STRC 0 to 255
ASCII string up to If STFORMAT is STRING (default is null 15 characters character string). See Note 1. EXPSTRC 0 to 255 If STFORMAT is NUM (default is 1)
ASCII string up to If STFORMAT is STRING (default is null 15 characters character string). See Note 1. STFMODE OFF ALMONLY LINEFAIL SSBITMDE SONET SDH Alarms off, no traffic protection (default) Alarms on, no traffic protection Alarms on, with traffic protection. See Notes 2 and 3. Optical signal transmitted is SONET format (default) Optical signal transmitted is SDH format
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-253 Table 2-293 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter SST Possible values TS TS-DEA Description Test. See Note 4. Test Deactivated
Note 1: The Possible values of the section trace messages depend on the STFORMAT value. If STFORMAT is NUM, the Possible values are 0 to 255. If STFORMAT is STRING, the Possible values are any printable alphanumeric ASCII string up to 15 characters (except comma, colon, semi-colon, equal sign, or question mark) or a NULL character string (for example, STRC=, or EXPSTRC=,). Enclose the ASCII string in double quotes () to maintain case sensitivity. The string must begin and end with the double quotes. You cannot use double quotes, or any special character, as part of the ASCII string. Note 2: If STFMODE is currently set to LINEFAIL, you cannot modify the values of STFORMAT, STRC, or EXPSTRC, unless you also change STFMODE to OFF or ALMONLY in the same command. Note 3: STFMODE can only be changed to LINEFAIL if the values of STFORMAT, STRC, and EXPSTRC are not being changed in the same command. Note 4: Test access secondary state is supported in slots 3 through 10 only. Example input
At the NEWYORK network element, set the SDTH for the OC-192 facility in slot 11 to 10-7 errors per second and the STFMODE to LINEFAIL and the SSBITMDE to SONET:
ED-OC192:NEWYORK:OC192-11:CTAG23:::SDTH=7,STFMODE=LINEFAIL, SSBITMDE=SONET;
ED-OC3
The Edit OC-3 command is used to set the signal degrade threshold (SDTH) for OC-3 facilities. The signal degrade threshold determines the bit error rate (BER) in a received OC-3 signal at which an autonomous protection switch occurs. an autonomous linear protection switch occurs between two 1+1 linear protected OC-3 facilities. (OC-3 facilities are provisioned for 1+1 linear protection with the ENT-FFP-OC3 command. See page 3-55 for more information on the ENT-FFP-OC3 command.) an autonomous protection switch occurs between two path-protected (switchmate) OC-3 facilities. (Path protection occurs either at the STS-3c, STS-1, or VT1.5 levels. To provision path protection, see the ED-CRS-xx or ENT-CRS-xx commands. Provisioning the SDTH parameter on an optical interface provisions the SDTH for the line and for all signals (STS-3c, STS-1, VT1.5) on that line. The Edit OC-3 command is also used to edit the section trace parameters. The user can edit the outgoing section trace message, the expected section trace message, the section trace format, and the section trace failure mode. The Edit OC-3 command is also used to edit SS Bits parameters. By default, the value of SS Bits is SONET but it can also be set to SDH. The following cannot be edited on the Host OCn prov-link, and the DSM circuit packs OCn line facility: remote node type (REMOTE=OM3X00) SS Bit Operation Mode (SSBITMDE=SONET) Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-OC3:[TID]:AID:CTAG:::[SDTH=Domain][,STFORMAT=Domain] [,STRC=Domain][,EXPSTRC=Domain][,STFMODE=Domain] [,SSBITMDE=Domain][,REMOTE=Domain]:[SST]; Table 2-294 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. Identifies an OC-3 facility. Correlation tag
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-255 Table 2-294 (continued) Syntax definition Field SDTH Purpose Signal degrade threshold, bit error level at which a linear autonomous protection switch takes place. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Section trace format. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Outgoing section trace message. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Expected section trace message. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Section trace fail mode. See Parameter descriptions table for details. SS bits mode Type of node at remote end (for section trace purposes). See Parameter descriptions table for details. Secondary state. See Parameter descriptions table for details.
STFORMAT STRC EXPSTRC STFMODE SSBITMDE REMOTE SST Table 2-295 AID descriptions AID type
Command-specific values
Purpose Identify the OC-3 facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 Identify the DSM or MS DSM OCn facility where slot# = 1 or 2 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4
OC-3 OC3-slot#-port# Facility AID OC3-slot#-ALL
OC3-slot#-1-%HLINK-OC3-hslot#DSM or hport# MS DSM OCn Facility AID
Table 2-296 Parameter descriptions Parameter SDTH Possible values 5 to 9 Description Translates to 10-5 to 10-9 (default is 6) Section trace message is 1 byte long (default) Section trace message is up to 15 bytes long
STFORMAT NUM STRING
2-256 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-296 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter STRC Possible values 0 to 255 Description if STFORMAT is NUM (default is 1)
ASCII string up to if STFORMAT is STRING (default is null 15 characters character string). See Note 1. EXPSTRC 0 to 255 if STFORMAT is NUM (default is 1)
ASCII string up to if STFORMAT is STRING (default is null 15 characters character string). See Note 1. STFMODE OFF ALMONLY LINEFAIL SSBITMDE SONET SDH REMOTE EXPRESS OC48 SST AINS AINS-DEA TS TS-DEA Alarms off, no traffic protection (default) Alarms on, no traffic protection Alarms on, with traffic protection. See Notes 2 and 3. SS bits operate in SONET mode (default) SS bits operate in SDH mode Optical Metro node (default) OC-48 node Auto in-service Auto in-service deactivated Test Test Deactivated
Note 1: The Possible values of the section trace messages depend on the STFORMAT value. If STFORMAT is NUM, the Possible values are 0 to 255. If STFORMAT is STRING, the Possible values are any printable alphanumeric ASCII string up to 15 characters (except comma, colon, semi-colon, equal sign, or question mark) or a NULL character string (for example, STRC=, or EXPSTRC=,). Enclose the ASCII string in double quotes () to maintain case sensitivity. The string must begin and end with the double quotes. You cannot use double quotes, or any special character, as part of the ASCII string. Note 2: If STFMODE is currently set to LINEFAIL, you cannot modify the values of STFORMAT, STRC, or EXPSTRC, unless you also change STFMODE to OFF or ALMONLY in the same command. Note 3: STFMODE can be only be changed to LINEFAIL if the values of STFORMAT, STRC, and EXPSTRC are not being changed in the same command.
Optical Metro 3500
At the NEWYORK network element, set the SDTH for OC-3 facility in slot 7 port 1 to 10-7 errors per second, set STFMODE to LINEFAIL, and set SSBITMDE to SONET:
ED-OC3:NEWYORK:OC3-7-1:CTAG23:::SDTH=7,STFMODE=LINEFAIL, SSBITMDE=SONET;
At the OTTAWA network element, edit the section trace information for OC-3 facility in slot 1 hslot 3 hport 1:
ED-OC3:OTTAWA:OC3-1-1-%HLINK-OC3-3-1:ctag12:::STFORMAT=STRING, STRC=DSMTM1;
ED-OC48
The Edit OC-48 command is used to set the signal degrade threshold (SDTH) for OC-48 facilities. The signal degrade threshold determines the bit error rate (BER) in a received OC-48 signal at which an autonomous protection switch occurs. An autonomous linear protection switch occurs between two 1+1 linear protected OC-48 facilities. (OC-48 facilities are provisioned for 1+1 linear protection with the ENT-FFP-OC48 command. See page 3-57 for more information on the ENT-FFP-OC48 command.) The Edit OC-48 command is also used to edit section trace parameters and SS Bits parameters. By default, the value of SS Bits is SONET but it can also be set to SDH. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-OC48:[TID]:AID:CTAG:::[SDTH=Domain][,STFORMAT=Domain] [,STRC=Domain][,EXPSTRC=Domain][,STFMODE=Domain] [,SSBITMDE=Domain]:,[SST]; Table 2-297 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SDTH Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. Identifies an OC-48 facility. Correlation tag Signal degrade threshold, bit error level at which a linear autonomous protection switch takes place. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Section trace format. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Outgoing section trace value. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Expected incoming section trace value. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Section trace fail mode. See Parameter descriptions table for details. SS bit mode for optical signal. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Secondary state. See Parameter descriptions table for details.
STFORMAT STRC EXPSTRC STFMODE SSBITMDE SST
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-259 Table 2-298 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the OC-48 facility where slot# = 11,12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS
OC-48 Facility AID OC48-slot#
Table 2-299 Parameter descriptions Parameter SDTH Possible values 5 to 9 Description Translates to 10-5 to 10-9 (default is 6) Integer 1 byte long (default) Section trace message is up to 15 bytes long if STFORMAT is NUM (default is 1)
STFORMAT NUM STRING STRC 0 to 255
ASCII string up to if STFORMAT is STRING (default is null 15 characters character string). See Note 1. EXPSTRC 0 to 255 if STFORMAT is NUM (default is 1)
ASCII string up to if STFORMAT is STRING (default is null 15 characters character string). See Note 1. STFMODE OFF ALMONLY LINEFAIL SSBITMDE SONET SDH Alarms off, no traffic protection (default) Alarms on, no traffic protection Alarms on, with traffic protection. See Notes 2 and 3. Optical signal transmitted is SONET format (default) Optical signal transmitted is SDH format
2-260 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-299 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter SST Possible values TS TS-DEA Description Test. See Note 4. Test Deactivated
Note 1: The Possible values of the section trace messages depend on the STFORMAT value. If STFORMAT is NUM, the Possible values are 0 to 255. If STFORMAT is STRING, the Possible values are any printable alphanumeric ASCII string up to 15 characters (except comma, colon, semi-colon, equal sign, or question mark) or a NULL character string (for example, STRC=, or EXPSTRC=,). Enclose the ASCII string in double quotes () to maintain case sensitivity. The string must begin and end with the double quotes. You cannot use double quotes, or any special character, as part of the ASCII string. Note 2: If STFMODE is currently set to LINEFAIL, you cannot modify the values of STFORMAT, STRC, or EXPSTRC, unless you also change STFMODE to OFF or ALMONLY in the same command. Note 3: STFMODE can only be changed to LINEFAIL if the values of STFORMAT, STRC, and EXPSTRC are not being changed in the same command. Note 4: Test access secondary state is supported in slots 3 through 10 only. Example input
At the NEWYORK network element, set the SDTH for the OC-48 facility in slot 11 to 10-7 errors per second and the STFMODE to LINEFAIL and the SSBITMDE to SONET:
ED-OC48:NEWYORK:OC48-11:CTAG23:::SDTH=7,STFMODE=LINEFAIL, SSBITMDE=SONET;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-PMCONFIG-EC1
The Edit Performance Monitoring Configuration EC-1 command instructs the network element to set the PM threshold crossing report type and/or to reset the receive physical PM thresholding baseline value for the EC-1 facility. You can set the report type to one of the following options: threshold crossing alert (TCA) TCA summary alarm both TCA and TCA summary alarm no reporting To set the report type to both TCA and TCA summary alarm, use the ampersand (&) as a separator for grouping values in the THMODE parameter. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-PMCONFIG-EC1:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[LOCN],[DIRN],[TMPER]: [THMODE=DOMAIN],[RXPHYBASE=DOMAIN]; Table 2-300 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LOCN DIRN TMPER THMODE RXPHYBASE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies Correlation tag The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The PM threshold crossing report type of the entity identified by the AID Used to reset the baseline value for receive physical PM thresholding
2-262 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-301 AID descriptions AID type EC1 Command-specific values Purpose EC1-slot#-port# EC1-slot#-ALL EC1-ALL Identify the EC-1 facilities, where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port # = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port # = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 All EC-1 facilities
ALL Table 2-302 Parameter descriptions Parameter LOCN Possible values null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed THMODE TCA ALARM NONE Grouping allowed RXPHYBASE RESET NULL
Description Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals
DIRN
TMPER
Default: TCA reporting TCA summary alarm reporting No reporting
The baseline takes the current receive physical value from the hardware
Example input
For EC-1 facilities (all applicable directions and locations) on network element BOSTON, set TCA summary alarm reporting for 15-minute threshold crossings.
ED-PMCONFIG-EC1:BOSTON:ALL:CTAG12::,,15-MIN:THMODE=ALARM,;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-PMCONFIG-ETH
The Edit Performance Monitoring Configuration Ethernet command instructs the network element to set the PM threshold crossing report type and/or to reset the receive physical PM thresholding baseline value for an Ethernet facility. You can set the report type to one of the following options: threshold crossing alert (TCA) TCA summary alarm both TCA and TCA summary alarm no reporting To set the report type to both TCA and TCA summary alarm, use the ampersand (&) as a separator for grouping values in the THMODE parameter. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-PMCONFIG-ETH:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[LOCN],[DIRN],[TMPER]: [THMODE=DOMAIN],[RXPHYBASE=DOMAIN]; Table 2-303 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LOCN DIRN TMPER THMODE RXPHYBASE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies Correlation tag The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The PM threshold crossing report type of the entity identified by the AID Used to reset the baseline value for receive physical PM thresholding
2-264 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-304 AID descriptions AID type ETH Command-specific values Purpose ETH-slot#-port# ETH-slot#-ALL ETH-ALL Identify the Ethernet facilities, where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P slot = 3 to 6; port = 1 to 8, Hline = OC3 or OC12, Hslot = 3 to10, Hport = 1 to 4
MS DSM ETH
ETH-slot-port-%HLINKHline-Hslot-Hport
Table 2-305 Parameter descriptions Parameter LOCN Possible values null NEND FEND ALL Description Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Note: FEND is not applicable for MS DSM ETH facility DIRN null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed TCA ALARM NONE Grouping allowed Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals Default: TCA reporting TCA summary alarm reporting No reporting The baseline takes the current receive physical value from the hardware
TMPER
THMODE
RXPHYBASE RESET NULL Example input
For Ethernet facility 1 in slot 10 of network element BOSTON, set TCA summary alarm reporting for 15-minute threshold crossings.
ED-PMCONFIG-ETH:BOSTON:ETH-10-1:CTAG12::,,15-MIN: THMODE=ALARM,;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-PMCONFIG-FC
The Edit Performance Monitoring Configuration Fibre Channel command instructs the network element to set the PM threshold crossing report type and/or to reset the receive physical PM thresholding baseline value for a Fibre Channel facility. You can set the report type to one of the following options: threshold crossing alert (TCA) TCA summary alarm both TCA and TCA summary alarm no reporting To set the report type to both TCA and TCA summary alarm, use the ampersand (&) as a separator for grouping values in the THMODE parameter. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-PMCONFIG-FC:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[LOCN],[DIRN],[TMPER]: [THMODE=DOMAIN],[RXPHYBASE=DOMAIN]; Table 2-306 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LOCN DIRN TMPER THMODE RXPHYBASE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies Correlation tag The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The PM threshold crossing report type of the entity identified by the AID Used to reset the baseline value for receive physical PM thresholding
2-266 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-307 AID descriptions AID type FC Command-specific values FC-slot#-port# FC-slot#-ALL FC-ALL Purpose Identify the Fibre Channel facilities, where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2
Table 2-308 Parameter descriptions Parameter LOCN Possible values null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed THMODE TCA ALARM NONE Grouping allowed RXPHYBASE RESET NULL The baseline takes the current receive physical value from the hardware Default: TCA reporting TCA summary alarm reporting No reporting Description Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals
DIRN
TMPER
Example input
For Fibre Channel facility 1 in slot 10 of network element BOSTON, set TCA summary alarm reporting for 15-minute threshold crossings.
ED-PMCONFIG-FC:BOSTON:ETH-10-1:CTAG12::,,15-MIN: THMODE=ALARM,;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-PMCONFIG-OC12
The Edit Performance Monitoring Configuration OC-12 command instructs the network element to set the PM threshold crossing report type and/or to reset the receive physical PM thresholding baseline value for the OC-12 facility. You can set the report type to one of the following options: threshold crossing alert (TCA) TCA summary alarm both TCA and TCA summary alarm no reporting To set the report type to both TCA and TCA summary alarm, use the ampersand (&) as a separator for grouping values in the THMODE parameter. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-PMCONFIG-OC12:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[LOCN],[DIRN],[TMPER]: [THMODE=DOMAIN],[RXPHYBASE=DOMAIN]; Table 2-309 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LOCN DIRN TMPER THMODE RXPHYBASE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies Correlation tag The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The PM threshold crossing report type of the entity identified by the AID Reset the baseline value for receive physical PM thresholding
2-268 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-310 AID descriptions AID type OC12 Command-specific Purpose values OC12-slot#-port# OC12-slot#-ALL OC12-ALL ALL OC12-slot-1%HLINK-OC12Hslot-Hport Identify the OC-12 facilities where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12, 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# =1 for OC-12, 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS Identify a single MS DSM termination module, where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
MS DSM AID
Table 2-311 Parameter descriptions Parameter LOCN Possible values null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed THMODE TCA ALARM NONE Grouping allowed RXPHYBASE RESET NULL Example input The baseline takes the current receive physical value from the hardware Default: TCA reporting TCA summary alarm reporting No reporting Description Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals
DIRN
TMPER
For OC-12 facilities (all applicable directions and locations) on network element BOSTON, set TCA summary alarm reporting for 15-minute threshold crossings.
ED-PMCONFIG-OC12:BOSTON:ALL:CTAG12::,,15-MIN: THMODE=ALARM,;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-PMCONFIG-OC192
The Edit Performance Monitoring Configuration OC-192 command instructs the network element to set the PM threshold crossing report type and/or to reset the optical power received (OPR) physical PM threshold baseline value for the OC-192 facility. You can set the report type to one of the following options: threshold crossing alert (TCA) TCA summary alarm both TCA and TCA summary alarm no reporting To set the report type to both TCA and TCA summary alarm, use the ampersand (&) as a separator for grouping values in the THMODE parameter. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-PMCONFIG-OC192[TID]:AID:CTAG::[LOCN],[DIRN],[TMPER]: [THMODE=DOMAIN],[RXPHYBASE=DOMAIN]; Table 2-312 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LOCN DIRN TMPER THMODE RXPHYBASE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies Correlation tag The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The PM threshold crossing report type of the entity identified by the AID Reset the baseline value for receive physical PM thresholding
2-270 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-313 AID descriptions AID type OC192 Command-specific values Purpose OC192-slot# OC192-ALL ALL Identify the OC-192 facilities, where slot# = 11 or 12
Table 2-314 Parameter descriptions Parameter LOCN Possible values null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping is allowed TCA ALARM NONE Grouping is allowed RXPHYBASE RESET NULL Example input Reset the Receive Physical Baseline value Description Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default 15-min bins (for OPR Normal only) 15-Minute bins (for OPR Normal only) 1-Day bins (for OPR Normal only) Untimed bins (for OPR only) All intervals Default TCAs only Summary alarms only Disable both TCAs and summary alarms
DIRN
TMPER
THMODE
For OC-192 facilities on network element BOSTON, reset physical PM, optical power received (OPR) to the current value.
ED-PMCONFIG-OC192:BOSTON:ALL:CTAG12::,,1-UNT,,RXPHYBASE=RESET;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-PMCONFIG-OC3
The Edit Performance Monitoring Configuration OC-3 command instructs the network element to set the PM threshold crossing report type and/or to reset the receive physical PM thresholding baseline value for the OC-3 facility. You can set the report type to one of the following options: threshold crossing alert (TCA) TCA summary alarm both TCA and TCA summary alarm no reporting To set the report type to both TCA and TCA summary alarm, use the ampersand (&) as a separator for grouping values in the THMODE parameter. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-PMCONFIG-OC3:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[LOCN],[DIRN],[TMPER]: [THMODE=DOMAIN],[RXPHYBASE=DOMAIN]; Table 2-315 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LOCN DIRN TMPER THMODE RXPHYBASE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies Correlation tag The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The PM threshold crossing report type of the entity identified by the AID Reset the baseline value for receive physical PM thresholding
2-272 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-316 AID descriptions AID type OC3 Command-specific values OC3-slot#-port# OC3-slot#-ALL OC3-ALL ALL MS DSM AID Purpose Identify the OC-3 facilities, where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 All OC-3 facilities
OC3-slot-1-%HLINK-OC3-Hslot Identify the OC-3 facilities, where -Hport slot# = 1, 2 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4
DIRN
TMPER
Example input
For OC-3 facilities (all applicable directions and locations) on network element BOSTON, set TCA summary alarm reporting for 15-minute threshold crossings.
ED-PMCONFIG-OC3:BOSTON:ALL:CTAG12::,,15-MIN:THMODE=ALARM,; Optical Metro 3500 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
ED-PMCONFIG-OC48
The Edit Performance Monitoring Configuration OC-48 command instructs the network element to set the PM threshold crossing report type and/or to reset the optical power received (OPR) physical PM threshold baseline value for the OC-48 ER facility. You can set the report type to one of the following options: threshold crossing alert (TCA) TCA summary alarm both TCA and TCA summary alarm no reporting To set the report type to both TCA and TCA summary alarm, use the ampersand (&) as a separator for grouping values in the THMODE parameter. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-PMCONFIG-OC48:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[LOCN],[DIRN],[TMPER]: [THMODE=DOMAIN],,[RXPHYBASE=DOMAIN]; Table 2-318 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LOCN DIRN TMPER THMODE RXPHYBASE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies Correlation tag The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The PM threshold crossing report type of the entity identified by the AID Reset the baseline value for receive physical PM thresholding
2-274 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-319 AID descriptions AID type OC48 Command-specific Purpose values OC48-slot# OC48-ALL ALL Identify the OC-48 facilities, where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS, 11 or 12 for OC-48
DIRN
TMPER
Example input
For OC-48 facilities on network element BOSTON, reset physical PM, optical power received (OPR) to the current value.
ED-PMCONFIG-OC48:BOSTON:ALL:CTAG12::,,1-UNT,,RXPHYBASE=RESET;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-PMCONFIG-STS1
The Edit Performance Monitoring Configuration STS-1 command instructs the network element to set the PM threshold crossing report type and/or to reset the receive physical PM thresholding baseline value for the STS-1 facility. You can set the report type to one of the following options: threshold crossing alert (TCA) TCA summary alarm both TCA and TCA summary alarm no reporting To set the report type to both TCA and TCA summary alarm, use the ampersand (&) as a separator for grouping values in the THMODE parameter. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-PMCONFIG-STS1:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[LOCN],[DIRN],[TMPER]: [THMODE=DOMAIN],[RXPHYBASE=DOMAIN]; Table 2-321 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LOCN DIRN TMPER THMODE RXPHYBASE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies Correlation tag The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The PM threshold crossing report type of the entity identified by the AID Reset the baseline value for receive physical PM thresholding
2-276 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-322 AID descriptions AID type STS1 AID Command-specific values OC3-slot#-port#-sts# OC3-slot#-port#-ALL OC3-slot#-ALL OC3-ALL OC3-slot#-sts#-%HLINKOC3-hslot#-hport# Purpose Identify the STS-1 facilities on the OC-3 or OC-3x4 interfaces where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3, 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 Identify the STS-1 facilities on the DSM interfaces where slot# = 1 or 2 sts# = 1 to 3 hslot# = 1 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 Identify all STS-1 facilities on the DSM interfaces where slot# = 1 or 2 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the STS-1 facilities on OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS interfaces where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# =1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 to 12
OC3-slot#-ALL-%HLINKOC3-hslot#-hport#
OC12-slot#-port#-sts# OC12-slot#-port#-ALL OC12-slot#-ALL OC12-ALL
OC12-slot#-sts#-%HLINK- Identify the STS-1 facilities on the DSM OC12-hslot#-hport# interfaces where OC12-slot#-ALL-%HLINK- slot# = 1 or 2 sts# = 1 to 12 OC12-hslot#-hport# hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 OC192-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-ALL OC192-ALL EC1-slot#-port# EC1-slot#-ALL EC1-ALL Identify the STS-1 facilities on OC-192 interfaces where slot# = 11 or 12 port= 1 to 192 Identify the STS-1 facilities on the EC-1x3, EC-1x12, or DS3/EC-1x12 interfaces where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port # = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port # = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 All applicable STS-1 path facilities
ALL
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-277 Table 2-323 Parameter descriptions Parameter LOCN Possible values null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed THMODE TCA ALARM NONE Grouping allowed RXPHYBASE RESET NULL Example input The baseline takes the current receive physical value from the hardware Default: TCA reporting TCA summary alarm reporting No reporting Description Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals
DIRN
TMPER
For the STS-1 #2 facility (all applicable directions and locations) for the OC-3 circuit pack in slot 9 on network element BOSTON, set TCA summary alarm reporting for 15-minute threshold crossings.
ED-PMCONFIG-STS1:BOSTON:OC3-9-1-2:CTAG12::,,15-MIN: THMODE=ALARM,;
ED-PMCONFIG-STS12C
The Edit Performance Monitoring Configuration STS-12c command instructs the network element to set the PM threshold crossing report type and/or to reset the receive physical PM thresholding baseline value for the STS-12c facility. You can set the report type to one of the following options: threshold crossing alert (TCA) TCA summary alarm both TCA and TCA summary alarm no reporting To set the report type to both TCA and TCA summary alarm, use the ampersand (&) as a separator for grouping values in the THMODE parameter. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-PMCONFIG-STS12C:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[LOCN],[DIRN],[TMPER]: [THMODE=DOMAIN],[RXPHYBASE=DOMAIN]; Table 2-324 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LOCN DIRN TMPER THMODE RXPHYBASE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies Correlation tag The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The PM threshold crossing report type of the entity identified by the AID Reset the baseline value for receive physical PM thresholding
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-279 Table 2-325 AID descriptions AID type STS-12c Command-specific values OC12-slot#-port#-sts# OC12-slot#-port#-ALL OC12-slot#-ALL OC12-ALL Purpose Identify the STS-12c facilities, where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 Identify the STS-12c facilities, where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37 slot# = 11 to 12 sts# = 1, 13, ..., 181 All applicable STS-12c path facilities
OC48-slot#-sts# OC48-slot#-ALL OC48-ALL OC192-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-ALL OC192-ALL ALL Table 2-326 Parameter descriptions Parameter LOCN Possible values null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL
Description Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions
DIRN
2-280 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-326 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter TMPER Possible values null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed THMODE TCA ALARM NONE Grouping allowed RXPHYBASE RESET NULL Example input The baseline takes the current receive physical value from the hardware Default: TCA reporting TCA summary alarm reporting No reporting Description Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals
For the STS-12c #1 facility (all applicable directions and locations) for the OC-12 circuit pack in slot 9 on network element BOSTON, set TCA summary alarm reporting for 15-minute threshold crossings.
ED-PMCONFIG-STS12C:BOSTON:OC12-9-1:CTAG12::,,15-MIN: THMODE=ALARM,;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-PMCONFIG-STS24C
The Edit Performance Monitoring Configuration STS-24c command instructs the network element to set the PM threshold crossing report type and/or to reset the optical power received (OPR) physical PM threshold baseline value for the STS24c facility. You can set the report type to one of the following options: threshold crossing alert (TCA) TCA summary alarm both TCA and TCA summary alarm no reporting To set the report type to both TCA and TCA summary alarm, use the ampersand (&) as a separator for grouping values in the THMODE parameter. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-PMCONFIG-STS24C:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[LOCN],[DIRN],[TMPER]: [THMODE=Domain],[RXPHYBASE=DOMAIN]; Table 2-327 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LOCN DIRN TMPER THMODE RXPHYBASE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies Correlation tag The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The PM threshold crossing report type of the entity identified by the AID Reset the baseline value for receive physical PM thresholding
2-282 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-328 AID descriptions AID type STS-24c Command-specific values Purpose OC192-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-ALL OC192-ALL OC48-slot#-sts# OC48-slot#-ALL OC48-ALL Table 2-329 Parameter descriptions Parameter LOCN Possible values null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-min 1-day 1null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT All Grouping is allowed THMODE TCA ALARM NONE Grouping allowed Default TCAs only Summary alarms only Disable both TCAs and summary alarms Description Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default 15-min bins (for OPR Normal only) 15-Minute bins (for OPR Normal only) 1-Day bins (for OPR Normal only) Untimed bins (for OPR only) All intervals Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval All intervals Identify the STS-24c facility where slot# = 11 or 12 sts# =1, 25, 49, ..., 169 All slots with OC-192 circuit packs Identify the STS-24c facility where slot# = 3 to 12, sts# =1, 25 All slots with OC-48 STS circuit packs
DIRN
TMPER
RXPHYBASE RESET NULL Example input
The baseline takes the current receive physical value from the hardware
For STS24c facilities on network element BOSTON, reset physical PM, optical power received (OPR) to the current value.
ED-PMCONFIG-STS24C:BOSTON:ALL:CTAG12::,,1-UNT,
Optical Metro 3500
ED-PMCONFIG-STS3C
The Edit Performance Monitoring Configuration STS-3c command instructs the network element to set the PM threshold crossing report type and/or to reset the receive physical PM thresholding baseline value for the STS-3c facility. You can set the report type to one of the following options: threshold crossing alert (TCA) TCA summary alarm both TCA and TCA summary alarm no reporting To set the report type to both TCA and TCA summary alarm, use the ampersand (&) as a separator for grouping values in the THMODE parameter. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-PMCONFIG-STS3C:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[LOCN],[DIRN],[TMPER]: [THMODE=DOMAIN],[RXPHYBASE=DOMAIN]; Table 2-330 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LOCN DIRN TMPER THMODE RXPHYBASE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies Correlation tag The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The PM threshold crossing report type of the entity identified by the AID Reset the baseline value for receive physical PM thresholding
2-284 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-331 AID descriptions AID type STS-3c AID Command-specific values OC3-slot#-port#-sts# OC3-slot#-port#-ALL OC3-slot#-ALL OC3-ALL OC3-slot-1-sts%HLINK-OC3-HslotHport OC3-slot-1-ALL%HLINK-OC3-HslotHport OC12-slot#-port#-sts# OC12-slot#-port#-ALL OC12-slot#-ALL OC-12-ALL Purpose Identify the STS-3c facility slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 sts# =1 Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-3 circuit pack where slot# = 1,2 sts# = 1 Hslot# = 3 to 10 Hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the STS-3c facility slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# =1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10 Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-3 circuit pack where slot# = 1,2 sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10 Hslot# = 3 to 10 Hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the STS-3c facility slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 sts# = 1, 4, 7, .., 46 slot# = 11 or 12 sts# = 1, 4, 7, ..., 190 All applicable STS-3c path facilities
OC12-slot-1-sts%HLINK-OC12Hslot-Hport OC12-slot-1-ALL%HLINK-OC12Hslot-Hport OC48-slot#-sts# OC48-slot#-ALL OC48-ALL OC192-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-ALL OC192-ALL ALL
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-285 Table 2-332 Parameter descriptions Parameter LOCN Possible values null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed THMODE TCA ALARM NONE Grouping allowed RXPHYBASE RESET NULL The baseline takes the current receive physical value from the hardware Default: TCA reporting TCA summary alarm reporting No reporting Description Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals
DIRN
TMPER
Example input
For the STS-3c #1 facility (all applicable directions and locations) for the OC-3 circuit pack in slot 9 on network element BOSTON, set TCA summary alarm reporting for 15-minute threshold crossings.
ED-PMCONFIG-STS3C:BOSTON:OC3-9-1-1:CTAG12::,,15-MIN: THMODE=ALARM,;
ED-PMCONFIG-STS48C
The Edit Performance Monitoring Configuration STS48c command instructs the network element to set the PM threshold crossing report type and/or to reset the optical power received (OPR) physical PM threshold baseline value for the STS48c facility. You can set the report type to one of the following options: threshold crossing alert (TCA) TCA summary alarm both TCA and TCA summary alarm no reporting To set the report type to both TCA and TCA summary alarm, use the ampersand (&) as a separator for grouping values in the THMODE parameter. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-PMCONFIG-STS48C[TID]:AID:CTAG::[LOCN],[DIRN],[TMPER]: [THMODE=Domain],[RXPHYBASE=DOMAIN]; Table 2-333 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LOCN DIRN TMPER THMODE RXPHYBASE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies Correlation tag The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The PM threshold crossing report type of the entity identified by the AID Reset the baseline value for receive physical PM thresholding
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-287 Table 2-334 AID descriptions AID type STS-48c Command-specific values Purpose OC192-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-ALL OC192-ALL OC48-slot#-sts# OC48-slot#-ALL OC48-ALL Table 2-335 Parameter descriptions Parameter LOCN Possible values null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-min 1-day 1null 15-MIN 1-DAY -UNT All Grouping is allowed THMODE TCA ALARM NONE Grouping allowed RXPHYBASE RESET NULL Example input The baseline takes the current receive physical value from the hardware Default TCAs only Summary alarms only Disable both TCAs and summary alarms Description Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default 15-min bins (for OPR Normal only) 15-Minute bins (for OPR Normal only) 1-Day bins (for OPR Normal only) Untimed bins (for OPR only) All intervals Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval All intervals Identify the STS-48c facility where slot# = 11 or 12 sts# =1, 49, 97, 145 All slots with OC-192 circuit packs Identify the STS-48c facility where slot# = 3 to 12, sts# =1 All slots with OC-48 STS circuit packs
DIRN
TMPER
For STS48c facilities on network element BOSTON, reset physical PM, optical power received (OPR) to the current value.
ED-PMCONFIG-STS48c:BOSTON:ALL:CTAG12::,,1-UNT,
ED-PMCONFIG-WAN
The Edit Performance Monitoring Configuration WAN command instructs the network element to set the PM threshold crossing report type and/or to reset the receive physical PM thresholding baseline value for a WAN facility. You can set the report type to one of the following options: threshold crossing alert (TCA) TCA summary alarm both TCA and TCA summary alarm no reporting To set the report type to both TCA and TCA summary alarm, use the ampersand (&) as a separator for grouping values in the THMODE parameter. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-PMCONFIG-WAN:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MONTYPE],[LOCN],[DIRN], [TMPER]:[THMODE=DOMAIN],[RXPHYBASE=DOMAIN]; Table 2-336 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LOCN DIRN TMPER THMODE RXPHYBASE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies Correlation tag The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The PM threshold crossing report type of the entity identified by the AID Used to reset the baseline value for receive physical PM thresholding
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-289 Table 2-337 AID descriptions AID type WAN Command-specific values Purpose WAN-slot#-port# WAN-slot#-ALL WAN-ALL Identify the WAN facilities, where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P Identify the WAN port where slot = 3 to 6, port = 1 to 8, HLINE = OC3 or OC12, Hslot# = 3 to 10, Hport# = 1 to 4
MS DSM WAN AID
WAN-slot-port-%HLINKHline-Hslot-Hport WAN-slot-ALL-%HLINKHline-Hslot-Hport
Table 2-338 Parameter descriptions Parameter MONTYPE Possible values null LDS LSDS LUAS ALL Grouping allowed null NEND FEND ALL Description Default: equivalent to ALL LCAS degraded seconds LCAS severely degraded seconds LCAS unavailable seconds All applicable MONTYPEs LDS, LSDS, LUAS are applicable only for 4x100FX and 8x100BT-P2P circuit packs. Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Note: FEND is not applicable for MS DSM WAN DIRN null TRMT RCV ALL Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions
LOCN
2-290 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-338 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter TMPER Possible values null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed THMODE TCA ALARM NONE Grouping allowed RXPHYBASE RESET NULL The baseline takes the current receive physical value from the hardware Default: TCA reporting TCA summary alarm reporting No reporting Description Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals
Example input
For WAN facility 1 in slot 10 of network element BOSTON, set TCA summary alarm reporting for 15-minute threshold crossings.
ED-PMCONFIG-WAN:BOSTON:WAN-10-1:CTAG12::,,15-MIN: THMODE=ALARM,;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-PTX25
The Edit X.25 Physical Port Configuration command is used to modify the physical port configuration of X.25. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-PTX25:[TID]::CTAG:::[RXCLKSRC=Domain][,TXCLKSRC=Domain] [,CTS_PIN=Domain][,DCD_PIN=Domain][,DSR_PIN=Domain] [,DTR_PIN=Domain][,RTS_PIN=Domain][,DSR=Domain][,DTR=Domain] [,RTS=Domain]; Table 2-339 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG RXCLKSRC TXCLKSRC CTS_PIN DCD_PIN DSR_PIN DTR_PIN RTS_PIN DSR DTR RTS Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Receive clock source Transmit clock source CTS pin configuration DCD pin configuration DSR pin configuration DTR pin configuration RTS pin configuration DSR pin initial value DTR pin initial value RTS pin initial value
Table 2-340 Parameter descriptions Parameter RXCLKSRC TXCLKSRC CTS_PIN Possible values Description RXEXT, TXEXT RXEXT, TXEXT ENABLED DISABLED (default RXEXT) Source of receive clock (default TXEXT) Source of transmit clock (default ENABLED) CTS pin configuration
2-292 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-340 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter DCD_PIN DSR_PIN DTR_PIN RTS_PIN DSR DTR RTS Possible values Description ENABLED DISABLED ENABLED DISABLED ENABLED DISABLED ENABLED DISABLED ON, OFF ON, OFF ON, OFF, AUTO (default DISABLED) DCD pin configuration (default DISABLED) DSR pin configuration (default ENABLED) DTR pin configuration (default ENABLED) RTS pin configuration (default ON) DSR pin initial value when DSR_PIN is enabled (default ON) DTR pin initial value when DTR_PIN is enabled (default ON) RTS pin initial value when RTS_PIN is enabled (see Note)
Note: When the range is set to AUTO, the RTS value is under hardware control. Example input
Modify the X.25 port configuration of OC3NP:

ED-PTX25:OC3NP::CTAG45:::RXCLKSRC=RXEXT,TXCLKSRC=RXEXT;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-ROLL-STS1
The Edit Rollover STS1 command is used to switch traffic from an existing connection to another connection previously established by an ENT-ROLL-STS1 command. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-ROLL-STS1:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=Domain,RTO=Domain[,VALID=Domain][,EDSWMATE=Domain]:SST; Table 2-341 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO VALID Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints Second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled (see Note) AID RFROM is to be rolled to (see Note) Command execution will be denied if the conditions on the node are inappropriate
EDSWMATE Used to switch the switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit SST Secondary state
2-294 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-342 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-1 facility on a DS3 circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3/EC-1x12 Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-3 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3
OC12-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 to 12 OC48-slot#-sts# Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1 to 48
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-295 Table 2-342 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 192 Identify the STS-1 facility on an EC-1 circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port# = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12
EC1-slot#-port#
WAN-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-1 facility on the WAN port where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 for 2x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 3 for 4x100FX-P2Por 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 21 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P Note: The WAN AID only applies to the fromAID and toAID fields. The WAN AID does not apply to the RFROM and RTO fields. STS1 Facility AID on MS DSM DS3-slot-port%HLINK-Hline-HslotHport slot = 3 or 5 port = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4 slot = 3 to 6; port = 1 to 8; sts = 1 to 3 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4 grp = 1 to 3 where grp 1 = DS1s 1 to 28, grp 2 = DS1s 29 to 56, grp 3 = DS1s 57 to 84 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4
WAN-slot-port-sts%HLINK-Hline-HslotHport STSMDS1-grp%HLINK-Hline-HslotHport
2-296 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-343 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values Description 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR VALID Y N (default) EDSWMATE Y N (default) SST SWITCHED (default) BRIDGED Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate. Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate. when switching from bridged to switched, SST=SWITCHED when backing out from switched to bridged, SST=BRIDGED
Example input
Rollover an STS1 working connection on the OC-3x4 circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between a DS3 service and the OC-3x4 circuit pack. Bridge the original OC-3 connection:
ENT-ROLL-STS1:OTTAWA:OC3-11-2-1,DS3-3-1:A::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-11-2-1,RTO=OC3-11-3-1,VALID=Y;

ED-ROLL-STS1:OTTAWA:OC3-11-2-1,DS3-3-1:B::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-11-2-1,RTO=OC3-11-3-1,VALID=Y:SWITCHED;

CMMT-ROLL-STS1:OTTAWA:OC3-11-2-1,DS3-4-1:C::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-11-2-1,RTO=OC3-11-3-1;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-ROLL-STS12C
The Edit Rollover STS-12c command is used to switch traffic from an existing connection to another connection previously established by an ENT-ROLL-STS12c command. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-ROLL-STS12C:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=domain,RTO=domain[,VALID=Domain][,EDSWMATE=Domain]:SST; Table 2-344 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO VALID Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints Second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled (see Note) AID RFROM is to be rolled to (see Note) Command execution will be denied if the conditions on the node are inappropriate
2-298 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-345 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-48 circuit pack where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37 Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37, ... 181 Identify the STS-12c facility on the WAN port of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 sts# = 1 Note: The WAN AID only applies to the fromAID and toAID fields. The WAN AID does not apply to RFROM and RTO. Table 2-346 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR VALID Y N (default) Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate.
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-299 Table 2-346 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values Description Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate. when switching from bridged to switched, SST=SWITCHED when backing -out from switched to bridged, SST=BRIDGED
EDSWMATE Y N (default) SST SWITCHED (default) BRIDGED
Example input
Rollover an STS-12c working connection on the OC-12 circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between an OC-12 service and the OC-12 circuit pack. Bridge the original OC-12 working connection
Switch to the bridge connection

ED-ROLL-STS12C:OTTAWA:OC12-9-1-1,OC12-8-1-1:CTAG12::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC12-9-1-1,RTO=OC12-8-1-1,VALID=Y:SWITCHED;
Remove the original working connection

ED-ROLL-STS24C
ED-ROLL-STS24C:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=Domain,RTO=Domain[,VALID=Domain][,EDSWMATE=Domain]:SST; Table 2-347 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO VALID Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints Second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled (see Note) AID RFROM is to be rolled to (see Note) Command execution will be denied if the conditions on the node are inappropriate
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-301 Table 2-348 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-24c facility on an OC-48 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1, 25 Identify the STS-24c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 25, ... 169 Identify the STS-24c facility on the WAN port of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 sts# = 1 Note: The WAN AID only applies to the fromAID and toAID fields. The WAN AID does not apply to RFROM and RTO. Table 2-349 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values Description 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR VALID Y N (default) Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate.
STS24C OC48-slot#-sts# facility AID
OC192-slot#-sts#
2-302 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-349 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values Description Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate. when switching from bridged to switched, SST=SWITCHED when backing -out from switched to bridged, SST=BRIDGED
EDSWMATE Y N (default) SST SWITCHED (default) BRIDGED
Example input
Rollover an STS-24c working connection on the OC-48 STS circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between an OC-48 STS circuit pack and another OC-48 STS circuit pack. Bridge the original OC-48 working connection


Optical Metro 3500
ED-ROLL-STS3C
The Edit Rollover STS-3c command is used to switch traffic from an existing connection to another connection previously established by an ENT-ROLL-STS3C command. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
2-304 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-351 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-3 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, or 10 Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack where slot# =11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ..., 46 Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# =11, 12 sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ..., 190 Identify the STS-3c facility on the WAN port where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 for 2x100BT-P2P, 4x100FX-P2P, or 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1, 4, 7, ... 19 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P Note: The WAN AID only applies to the fromAID and toAID fields. The WAN AID does not apply to the RFROM and RTO fields.
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-305 Table 2-351 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-3c facility on the WAN port where slot = 3 to 6; port = 1 to 8 sts = 1; Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4
STS3C WAN-slot-port-sts-%H facility AID LINK-Hline-HslotHport
Table 2-352 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR VALID Y N (default) EDSWMATE Y N (default) SST SWITCHED (default) BRIDGED Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate. Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate. when switching from bridged to switched, SST=SWITCHED when backing -out from switched to bridged, SST=BRIDGED
Rollover an STS-3c working connection on the OC-3x4 circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between an OC-3 service and the OC-3x4 circuit pack. Bridge the original OC-3 working connection
ENT-ROLL-STS3C:OTTAWA:OC3-9-1-1,OC3-8-1-1:D::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-1-1,RTO=OC3-8-1-1,VALID=Y;

ED-ROLL-STS3C:OTTAWA:OC3-9-1-1,OC3-8-1-1:B::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-1-1,RTO=OC3-8-1-1,VALID=Y:SWITCHED;

CMMT-ROLL-STS3C:OTTAWA:OC3-9-1-1,OC3-8-1-1:C::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-1-1,RTO=OC3-7-1-1;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-ROLL-STS48C
2-308 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-354 AID descriptions AID type STS24C facility AID Command-specific values OC48-slot#-sts# Purpose slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1 slot# =11, 12 sts# = 1, 49, 97, ... 145
OC192-slot#-sts#
Table 2-355 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values Description 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR VALID Y N (default) EDSWMATE Y N (default) SST SWITCHED (default) BRIDGED Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate. Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate. when switching from bridged to switched, SST=SWITCHED when backing -out from switched to bridged, SST=BRIDGED
Optical Metro 3500
Rollover an STS-48c working connection on the OC-48 STS circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between an OC-48 STS circuit pack and another OC-48 STS circuit pack. Bridge the original OC-48 working connection


ED-ROLL-VT1
The Edit Rollover VT1 command is used to switch traffic from an existing connection to another connection previously established by an ENT-ROLL-VT1 command. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-ROLL-VT1:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=Domain,RTO=Domain[,VALID=Domain][,EDSWMATE=Domain]:SST; Table 2-356 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO VALID Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints Second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled (see Note) AID RFROM is to be rolled to (see Note) Command execution will be denied if the conditions on the node are inappropriate
EDSWMATE Used to switch the switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR SST Secondary state
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-311 Table 2-357 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose slot# = 4 to 10 port# = 1 to 12, grp = 1 to 3 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28 DS1 service module port# = 1 to 84 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 grp# = 1 to 3 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 sts# = 1 to 12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4
VT1.5 DS1-slot#-port# facility AID DS1-DFLT-grp DS1-slot#-port#-t1# DS1-slot#-port#-ALL DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-OC3-hslot#hport#
DS1-DFLT-grp#-%HLINK-OC3-hslot#hport# OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt# OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL
2-312 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-357 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 48 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port# = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 for sts# = 1 or 2 vtg# = 1 or 2 for sts# = 3 vt# = 1 to 4
VT1.5 OC48-slot#-sts#-vtg#-vt# facility AID OC48-slot#-sts#-ALL
Table 2-358 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values Description 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR EDSWMATE Y N (default) Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate.
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-313 Table 2-358 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter VALID Possible values Description Y N (default) SST SWITCHED (default) BRIDGED Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate. When switching from bridged to switched, SST=SWITCHED When backing -out from switched to bridged, SST=BRIDGED
Example input
Rollover a VT1.5 working connection on the OC-3x4 circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between a DS1 service and the OC-3x4 circuit pack. Bridge the original working OC-3 connection:

ED-ROLL-VT1:OTTAWA:OC3-10-2-1-7-1,DS1-4-4:B::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-10-2-1-7-1,RTO=OC3-10-3-1-7-1,VALID=Y:SWITCHED;

CMMT-ROLL-VT1:OTTAWA:OC3-10-2-1-7-1,DS1-4-4:C::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-10-2-1-7-1,RTO=OC3-10-3-1-7-1;
ED-SECU-PID
The Edit Security Password Identifier command is used by users to edit their own accounts password on the network element or the network processor. This command cannot be used to edit the password of another user. Password identifiers (PIDs) must meet the following guidelines: The PID must be between 8 and 10 characters. The PID can include alphabetical characters, numbers, and the following symbols: !#$%`()*+-./<=>@[]^_'{|}~ The PID must contain at least one alphanumeric character and one non-alphanumeric character (such as one of the above symbols or a number). The PID cannot contain any of the following characters: semicolon (;), colon (:), ampersand (&), comma (,), spaces (deleted as entered), control characters, and question mark (?). The PID cannot contain the associated user identifier (UID). You cannot use any of your previous five passwords or any words that are in the list of unusable passwords. The list of unusable passwords is set with the ENT-SECU-BADPID command and can be retrieved with the RTRV-SECU-BADPID command. A double quote () entered in the PID must be preceded by a backslash (\). The backslash is considered as a character in the length of the password. Carriage returns (<Enter>) are ignored. Security level Level 1 Input syntax
ED-SECU-PID:[TID]:UID:CTAG::OldPID,NewPID,NewPID;
Note 1: ALL is a valid target identifier (TID). Note 2: Passwords do not appear on screen. Note 3: Passwords must be entered twice for confirmation.
Table 2-359 Syntax definition Field TID UID Purpose Target identifier User identifier
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-315 Table 2-359 (continued) Syntax definition CTAG OldPID NewPID Example input Correlation tag Old user password identifier New user password identifier
Change the password for user FORD on the network element NEWYORK from PREFECT to PENGUINE:
ED-SECU-PID:NEWYORK:FORD:CTAG12::PREFECT,PENGUINE,PENGUINE;
ED-SECU-USER
The Edit Security User command is used to edit the security parameters associated with a user account on the network element or the network processor. Enter only the data parameters you want to change. The remaining attributes are not altered. The user identifier (UID) can be 1 to 10 alphanumeric characters. Parameter grouping of UIDs is not possible. Users with ADMIN privilege (level 4) cannot change their own UPC to a level below 4. This is to ensure that at least one UID with ADMIN privilege always exists. The last account in the network element with level 4 privilege cannot be deleted. Security level Level 4 Input syntax
ED-SECU-USER:[TID]:UID:CTAG::[NEWUID][,NEWPID][,NEWPID][,UPC]: [TMOUTA=Domain][,TMOUT=Domain][,PAGESTAT=Domain][,PAGE=Domain] [,ACCRSTAT=Domain][,ACCR=Domain][,MINW=Domain] [,PCND=Domain][,USERTYPE=Domain];
Note 1: ALL is a valid target identifier (TID). Note 2: Passwords do not appear on screen. Note 3: Passwords must be entered twice for confirmation.
Table 2-360 Syntax definition Field TID UID CTAG NewUID NewPID UPC TMOUTA Purpose Target identifier User identifier Correlation tag New user identifier New user password identifier User privilege code Automatic timeout flag. The user is automatically logged off from the network element if no valid TL1 command is sent within the specified TMOUT interval. Timeout interval in minutes. A decimal number from 1 to 99. The default is 30 minutes.
TMOUT
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-317 Table 2-360 (continued) Syntax definition Field PAGESTAT PAGE ACCRSTAT ACCR PCND MINW USERTYPE Purpose Password aging status Password aging time Password accreditation status Password accreditation time Early warning time Minimum waiting time User account type
Table 2-361 Parameter descriptions Parameter TMOUTA Possible values Description Y Timeout enabled. If TMOUTA is enabled and the TMOUT interval is not specified, the default is 30 minutes. Timeout disabled. The user will never be automatically logged off. TMOUT is irrelevant (set to 0 minutes). Timeout interval in minutes (default is 30). Turn off password aging. Turn on password aging. Password aging time in days (default is 45). Turn off password accreditation. Turn on password accreditation. Password accreditation time in days. The amount of time a user has to change a password that was assigned to the user account. The default is 0, which means that a password must be changed the day it is assigned to the user account. Early warning time in days (default is 14). The number of days before a password expires that the user is given a warning when logging into the network element.
TMOUT
1 to 99
PAGESTAT OFF (default) ON PAGE 0 to 999
ACCRSTAT OFF (default) ON ACCR 0 to 30
PCND
0 to 14
2-318 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-361 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter MINW Possible values Description 0 to 999 The minimum number of days that a user must wait before changing a password (default is 0). Note: This parameter applies even when password aging or password accreditation is turned off. However, this parameter does not apply when the password has been assigned and password accreditation is turned on. USERTYPE 0 1 Local Network
Note: You can create a temporary account by setting PAGESTAT=ON, ACCTSTAT=OFF, PAGE=X, and MINW=X+1. Example input
Change UID of ADMIN on network element NEWYORK to ADMIN2:

ED-SECU-USER:NEWYORK:ADMIN:CTAG12::ADMIN2;
Change UID and PID of UID ADMIN on network element NEWYORK to ADMIN2 and NTADMIN2 respectively:
ED-SECU-USER:NEWYORK:ADMIN:CTAG12::ADMIN2,NTADMIN2, NTADMIN2:TMOUTA=N;
Change UID and PID of UID ADMIN on network element NEWYORK to ADMIN2 and NTADMIN2 respectively, with a UPC level change from 4 to 3, a timeout interval of 60 minutes, an aging time of 60 days, an accreditation period of 20 days, and an early warning time of 7 days:
ED-SECU-USER:NEWYORK:ADMIN:CTAG12::ADMIN2,NTADMIN2,NTADMIN2, 3:TMOUTA=Y,TMOUT=60,PAGESTAT=ON,PAGE=60,ACCRSTAT=ON,ACCR=20, PCND=7;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-SITE-DSM
Use the Edit Site-DSM command to assign a site address to the DS1 Service Module (DSM) or the Multiservice DSM (MS DSM). The site address is an attribute used to identify the DSM and is only supported for circuit packs in slot 1 of the DSM. Note 1: Each DSM must have a site address. The DSM will not be operational until you assign a site address. Note 2: The DSM site will not be visible at the RTRV-RTG-TBL command. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-SITE-DSM:[TID]:AID:CTAG::SITE; Table 2-362 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SITE Table 2-363 AID description AID AID DSM or MS DSM Possible values DSM-%HLINKHLINE-hslot#-hport# Purpose Identify the DSM where HLINE=OC3 or OC12 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 The site address must be unique in the network element. Use the working OC-3 or OC-3x4 if protected. Example input Purpose Target identifier The DSM entity to act upon Correlation tag Site address. 1 to 40 characters enclosed within quotations.
Assign a site address to the DS1 service module of network element BOSTON:
ED-SITE-DSM:BOSTON:CTAG12::XYZ;
ED-STS1
The Edit STS-1 command is used to edit the expected incoming or outgoing path trace values, or both path trace values. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-STS1:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MON]:[EXPTRC=Domain], [TRC=Domain]; Table 2-364 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MONF EXPTRC TRC Table 2-365 AID descriptions Command-specific values DS3-slot#-port# Purpose Identify the STS-1 path facility on the DS3 slot# = 3 to 10 port# =1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3/EC-1x12 Identify the STS-1 path facility on the DS3 slot# = 3, 5, 7, or 9 port# =1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot# = 3 to 10; Hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the STS-1 path facility on the OC-3 slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 for OC-3, port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4, sts# = 1 to 3 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The STS-1 facility to act on. Correlation tag Path trace monitoring Expected incoming path trace message Outgoing path trace message
For MS DSM: DS3-slot#-port#%HLINK-HlineHslot#-Hport# OC3-slot#-port#-sts#
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-321 Table 2-365 (continued) AID descriptions Command-specific values OC12-slot#-port#-sts# Purpose Identify the STS-1 path facility on the OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 to 12 Identify the STS-1 path facility on the OC-48 or OC-48 STS slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1 to 48 Identify the STS-1 path facility on the OC-192 slot# = 11 or 12 sts# = 1 to 192 Identify the STS-1 path facility on the WAN port slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 for 2x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 3 for 4x100FX-P2Por 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 21 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P Identify the STS-1 path facility on the MS DSM WAN port slot = 3 to 6; port = 1 to 8 ; sts = 1 to 3 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot# = 3 to 10; Hport# = 1 to 6
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
2-322 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-366 Parameter descriptions Parameter MON Possible values ON OFF (default) EXPTRC (See Note) TRC (See Note) <ASCII string> <ASCII string> Description Enables path trace monitoring Disables path trace monitoring Any ASCII string of up to 62 characters Any ASCII string of up to 62 characters
Note 1: Enclose the ASCII string in double quotes () to maintain case sensitivity. The string must begin and end with the double quotes. You cannot use double quotes as part of the ASCII string. Note 2: For a DS3/EC-1x12 port, EXPTRC must be greater than one character for the STS Rx Path Trace Mismatch alarm to raise when the TRC value from the far-end is different from the EXPTRC value. Example
Edit the path trace value:

ED-STS1:NEWYORK:OC3-10-1-1:CTAG13::ON: EXPTRC=NEWYORKOC3-10-1-1,TRC=TXPATHDS3-5;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-STS12C
Use the Edit STS-12c command to edit the expected incoming and/or outgoing path trace values for an STS-12c path. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-STS12C:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MON]:[EXPTRC=Domain][,TRC=Domain]; Table 2-367 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MON EXPTRC TRC Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag Path trace monitoring Expected incoming path trace message Outgoing path trace message
Table 2-368 AID descriptions AID type WAN AID Command-specific values Purpose
WAN-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-12c path on the WAN port of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P where slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 or 2, sts# = 1
2-324 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-369 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values MON ON OFF (default) EXPTRC TRC A string up to 62 characters A string up to 62 characters The expected incoming path trace message The outgoing path trace message Description Enable or disable path trace monitoring
Note: Enclose the incoming and outgoing path trace message in double quotes () to maintain case sensitivity. You cannot use double quotes in the string. Example
Edit the path trace value for WAN port 2 of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P circuit pack in slot 9 of network element OTTAWA:
ED-STS12C:OTTAWA:WAN-9-2-1:CTAG13::ON: EXPTRC=MONTREALWAN-10-1-1,TRC=TXPATH;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-STS24C
Table 2-371 AID descriptions AID type WAN AID Command-specific values WAN-slot#-port#-sts# Purpose Identify the STS-24c path on the WAN port of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P where slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 or 2, sts# = 1
2-326 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-372 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values MON ON OFF (default) EXPTRC TRC A string up to 62 characters A string up to 62 characters The expected incoming path trace message The outgoing path trace message Description Enable or disable path trace monitoring
Edit the path trace value for WAN port 2 of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P circuit pack in slot 9 of network element OTTAWA:
Optical Metro 3500
ED-STS3C
Table 2-374 AID descriptions AID type WAN AID Command-specific values Purpose
WAN-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-3c path facility on the WAN port slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 for 2x100BT-P2P, 4x100FX-P2P, or 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1, 4, 7, ... 19 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P WAN-slot-port-sts-% HLINK-Hline-HslotHport Identify the STS-3c facility on the WAN port where slot = 3 to 6; port = 1 to 8 sts = 1; Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4
2-328 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-375 Parameter descriptions Parameter MON Possible values ON OFF (default) EXPTRC TRC A string up to 62 characters A string up to 62 characters The expected incoming path trace message The outgoing path trace message Description Enable or disable path trace monitoring
Edit the path trace value for WAN port 2 of the 2x100BT-P2P circuit pack in slot 9 of network element OTTAWA:
Optical Metro 3500
ED-SYS
Use the Edit System command to set the following: The path signal degrade threshold value for all VT and STS paths within the network element. The time out value for test access sessions. The point-to-point auto-provisioning mode for 2xGigE circuit packs. The state of flexible slot provisioning. The auto-concatenation mode. The misconnection mode for DSM/MS DSM shelves. You can also use this command to switch from SONET mode to a Superset (SONET and J-SDH) mode. Note: You cannot set the 2xGigE configuration mode if there are any slots on the shelf provisioned for 2xGigE equipment. Refer to DLT-EQPT on page 2-143 to deprovision 2xGigE equipment. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-SYS:[tid]::ctag:::[PATHSDTH=Domain][,JSDHOAM=Domain] [,TS_TIMEOUT=Domain][,OPEGEMODE=Domain][,FLEX=Domain] [,AC=Domain][,MISC_COND=Domain]; Table 2-376 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG PATHSDTH JSDHOAM TS_TIMEOUT OPEGEMODE FLEX AC MISC_COND Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Path signal degrade threshold value Japan SDH mode Test access timeout value 2xGigE point-to-point auto-provisioning mode Flexible slot provisioning state Auto-concatenation mode Misconnection mode for DSM/MS DSM shelves
2-330 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-377 Parameter descriptions Parameter PATHSDTH JSDHOAM Possible values Description 5 to 9 ON OFF (default) Path signal degrade threshold. Range is 1x10-5 1x10-9. Switch to SONET and J-SDH mode. Do not switch to SONET and J-SDH mode.
TS_TIMEOUT 0 to 900, default Time out value in seconds for test access is 300 sessions. OPEGEMODE RPR (default) PTPT Do not auto-provision 2xGigE circuit packs for point-to-point mode. Auto-provision a 2xGigE circuit pack for point-to-point mode when the 2xGigE equipment is provisioned on the shelf. Refer to the Planning and Ordering Guide (NTRN10AU) for information about this mode. Enable flexible slot provisioning for the shelf. Disable flexible slot provisioning for the shelf. Enable or disable auto-concatenation for all cross-connects on the network element. Note 1: The following alarms prevent auto-concatenation from being enabled on OC-3, OC-12, OC-48 and OC-192 facilities: LOS, STM, SD, LOF, EBER, RFI, and AIS. Note 2: The following alarms prevent auto-concatenation from being enabled on STS-3c, STS-12c, STS-24c and STS-48c facilities: SD, Rollover in Progress, AIS, SLM, UEQ, RFI, and EBER. MISC_COND ON (default) In case of a misconnection between the DSM/MS DSM and the Host optical facility, block traffic through the DSM/MS DSM aggregate circuit pack. In case of a misconnection between the DSM/MS DSM and the Host optical facility, do not block traffic through the DSM/MS DSM aggregate circuit pack.
FLEX
ON OFF (default)
AC
ON OFF (default)
OFF
At the NEWYORK network element, set the PATHSDTH to 1x10-5:

ED-SYS:NEWYORK:OC48-11::CTAG23:::PATHSDTH=5;
Example input
Optical Metro 3500
ED-T1
The Edit T1 command is used to edit DS1 facility signal, facility service, and auto-in-service parameters. If parameter and state changes are requested in the same edit command, the state change is processed first, followed by parameter updates. Note: To change primary state use the RMV-T1 and RST-T1 commands. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-T1:[TID]:AID:CTAG:::[EQLZ=Domain][,FENDNTE=Domain] [,FLMDE=Domain][,FMT=Domain][,LINECDE=Domain] [,MAP=Domain][,OMODE=Domain]][,NIU=Domain]::[,SST] [,AINS-TIME]; Table 2-378 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG EQLZ=Domain FENDNTE=Domain FLMDE=Domain FMT=Domain LINECDE=Domain MAP=Domain OMODE=Domain NIU=DOMAIN SST AINS-TIME Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. DS1s to act on. Correlation tag Facility signal attribute parameters. See the Parameter descriptions table on page 2-332.
Secondary state DS1 auto-in-service time
2-332 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-379 AID descriptions AID type DS1 AID DS1 AID Command-specific values DS1-slot#-port# DS1-slot#-ALL DS1-slot#-port#-t1# DS1-slot#-port#-ALL Purpose Identify the DS1s where slot# =4 to 10, port# =1 to 28 Identify the DS1s where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28
DSM AID
DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-<HLINE> Identify the DS1 port on DSM or -hslot#-hport# MS DSM where HLINE=OC3 or OC12 port# = 1 to 84 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 DS1-1-ALL-%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport# All DS1 ports on the DSM or MS DSM where HLINE=OC3 or OC12 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4
Table 2-380 Parameter descriptions Parameter EQLZ Possible values Description Cable connecting DS1 to DS1 cross-connect. If the cables for the incoming and outgoing streams are different, add TX or RX to the domain, for example 1RX or 2TX. 1, 2 and 3 set the values for both TX and RX cables. 1 1TX 1RX 2 2TX 2RX 3 3TX 3RX FENDNTE ANSI NOTANSI Default: short: 0 to 220 ft both directions 0 to 220 ft transmit 0 to 220 ft receive medium: 220 to 430 ft both directions 220 to 430 ft transmit 220 to 430 ft receive long: 430 to 655 ft both directions 430 to 655 ft transmit 430 to 655 ft receive Default: Far end NTE supports ANSI standards ANSI standards are not supported
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-333 Table 2-380 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter NIU Possible values N Y FLMDE BOTH INC OC N FMT SF ESF SF-TR08 LINECDE Description DS1 facility does not support NIU feature (default). DS1 facility does support NIU feature. Fault locate mode: Faults in the frame format will be checked for. Use N if DS1 data is unframed. Default: both incoming and outgoing data streams will have the frame format, as specified by FMT, checked. Only check incoming data. (Outgoing can be unframed.) Only check outgoing data. Do not check the frame format. (The DS1 facility can be unframed or used as a clear channel facility.) Default: Superframe format Extended Superframe format Superframe with TR08 extensions Line code. If the incoming and outgoing streams are different, add TX or RX to the domain, for example AMITX, B8ZSRX. Note: For the MS DSM, legacy coding parameters AMITX, AMIRX, B8ZSTX, B8ZSRX are supported when used in the same group. For example AMITX can be used only with AMIRX and not B8ZSRX. Provisioning of AMITX and AMIRX will be retrieved as AMI. The same is true for B8ZS coding group. AMIZCSTX parameter is not supported on MS DSM. AMI AMITX AMIRX Default: Alternate mark inversion (bipolar) both directions AMI transmit AMI receive
AMIZCSTX AMIZCS Transmit. If there are 8 zeros in a byte, the least significant will be changed to a one. B8ZS B8ZSTX B8ZSRX Bipolar with 8-zero substitution, both directions B8ZS Transmit B8ZS Receive
2-334 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-380 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter MAP Possible values Description The form of mapping for DS1 payloads into VT1.5s. Note: You must enter each MAP parameter in a separate command. VTASYN VTBYTE VTBIT Default:VT1.5 bit asynchronous mapping VT1.5 byte synchronous mapping VT1.5 bit synchronous mapping Note: If using VTBYTE mapping, one or both of these mappings can also be specified: SIGNLIN Robbed bit signaling bits are transported.
SIGNLOUT Out slot (S1 to S4) signaling bits are transported. Note 1: DS1 facilities on the DSM and MS DSM do not support SIGNLIN and SIGNLOUT. Note 2: Only VTBYTE and VTASYN mappings are supported by T1 facilities on MS DSM. OMODE NORM IDLE AZC Output mode: Default: The outgoing stream is a regular DS1 The outgoing stream is set to an idle code: repeating 1100 The outgoing stream will have any AIS code changed to all-zeros.
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-335 Table 2-380 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter SST (secondary state) Possible values AINS AINS-DEA TS TS-DEA AINS-TIME HH-MM (hour-minute) 00-01 to 96-00 Description auto-in-service auto-in-service deactivated test test deactivated Default = 04-00 (4 hours) Amount of time that an error-free signal must be present on the DS1 line in order for the auto-in-service state to clear. If an error-free signal is present for less than this period of time, the DS1 facility remains in an auto-in-service state. HH= 00-96 hours MM=00-59 minutes Note 1: The default secondary state for a DS1 facility is NULL. That is, when a DS1 facility autoprovisions, the secondary state is not auto-in-service. This state is reported as a blank in the TL1 response to a RTRV-T1 command. The purpose of the AINS-DEA parameter is to deactivate the AINS secondary state. When the AINS-DEA parameter is entered, it is not maintained as a secondary state and is not reported by the RTRV-T1 command. The secondary state remains NULL until it is changed with either the ENT-T1 or ED-T1 command. Note 2: The default secondary state for DS1 facilities on a provisioned DSM circuit pack is auto-in-service. Example input
Alter the provisioning for the DS1 facility on the DS1 circuit pack in slot 4 port 7; change the TX EQLZ value and set the FMT to ESF:
ED-T1:NEWYORK:DS1-4-7:CTAG123:::EQLZ=2TX,FMT=ESF;
Change all the DS1 facilities on the DS1 circuit pack in slot 6 to use B8ZS:
ED-T1:SEATTLE:DS1-6-ALL:CTAG123:::LINECDE=B8ZS;
Change all the DS1 facilities on the DS1 circuit pack in slot 6 to set the MAP to VTBYTE:
ED-T1:SEATTLE:DS1-6-ALL:CTAG123:::MAP=VTBYTE;
Edit the frame format and line code of all DS1 ports on the DS1 service module in hport 7 hport 3 for network element OTTAWA:
ED-T1:OTTAWA:DS1-1-ALL-%HLINK-OC3-7-3:CTAG12:::FMT=ESF, LINECDE=AMI;
ED-T3
The Edit T3 command is used to edit the service parameters (attributes) of a DS3 facility, such as the line buildout and auto in-service. Note: To change primary state use the RMV-T3 and commands. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-T3:[TID]:AID:CTAG:::[LBO=Domain][,FMT=Domain]] [,NIU=Domain]:[,SST][,AINS-TIME]; Table 2-381 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LBO FMT SST AINS-TIME NIU Table 2-382 AID descriptions AID type T3 AID Command-specific Purpose values DS3-slot#-port# DS3-slot#-ALL Identify the DS3s slot# =3, 5, 7, or 9 port# = 1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3VTx12 slot = 3 or 5; port = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to10 Hport = 1 to 4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. DS3s to act on. Correlation tag Line buildout Frame format Secondary state DS1 auto-in-service time Network Interface Unit
DS3-slot-portMS DSM T3 %HLINK-HlineFacility Hslot-Hport AID
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-337 Table 2-383 Parameter descriptions Parameter FMT Possible values Description ASYNC UNFR CBIT LBO 1 2 NIU N Y M13, multiplex framed (default) Unframed clear channel C-bit parity 0 to 224 ft to DS3 cross-connect (default) 225 to 450 ft to DS3 cross-connect DS3 facility does not support NIU feature (default). DS3 facility does support NIU feature. DS3 cross-connects must be present to activate the feature. auto-in-service auto-in-service deactivated test test deactivated Default = 04-00 (4 hours) Amount of time that an error-free signal must be present on the DS3 line in order for the auto-in-service state to clear. If an error-free signal is present for less than this period of time, the DS3 facility remains in an auto-in-service state. HH= 00-96 hours MM=00-59 minutes Example input
SST (secondary state)
AINS AINS-DEA TS TS-DEA
AINS-TIME (hour-minute)
HH-MM 00-01 to 96-00
Change the FMT of the DS3 facility on the DS3 circuit pack in slot 5 port 1 to UNFR:
ED-T3:NEWYORK:DS3-5-1:CTAG23:::FMT=UNFR;
ED-TARP-CONFIG
The Edit TARP Configuration command is used to configure the (TARP) processor parameters as required. Note: The Target Identifier Address Resolution Protocol (TARP) is a protocol used by TL1 managed network elements to convert TL1 target identifiers (TIDs) into network service access point (NSAPs). Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-TARP-CONFIG:[TID]::CTAG::OPERATION:[TMODE=Domain] [,NSEL=Domain][,LIFE=Domain][,PTYPE=Domain][,SEQ=Domain] [,THROTTLE=Domain][,T1=Domain][,T3=Domain][,LDBFLUSH=Domain] [,TDCFLUSH=Domain][,LDBELIFE=Domain];

Table 2-384 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG OPERATION TMODE NSEL LIFE PTYPE SEQ THROTTLE T1 T3 LDBFLUSH TDCFLUSH LDBELIFE Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Configuration operation. See Parameter descriptions. TARP mode Network selector PDU lifetime Protocol address type PDU sequence number Throttle and period TARP type 1 request period Address resolution request waiting period Loop detection buffer flush TARP data cache flush Loop detection buffer entry life
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-339 Table 2-385 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values Description SET: Set parameters specified in configuration operation. Supply at least one keyword-defined parameter. RESET: Reset parameters specified in configuration operation to default values by specifying only the keyword. RESETALL: Reset all parameters to default values. TARP mode Default: Both propagation and origination Network selector Default: AF for CLNP type of address PDU lifetime. A integer value from 0 to 65535 (hops) Default: 100 hops Protocol address type Default: FE for CLNP PDU sequence number. A integer value from 0 to 65535 ( number of hops) Default: 100 hops Throttle and period. A decimal number grouping. Throttle (integer) is the maximum number of PDUs processed within the time of interval period (second) Throttle default: 300 Period default: 2 An example is: THROTTLE=300&2 TARP type 1 request waiting period A integer value from 0 to 3600 seconds Default: 15 seconds
OPERATION SET RESET RESETALL
TMODE
PROPAGATION ORIGINATION BOTH NONE String of 2 hexadecimal digits null 0 to 65535 null
NSEL LIFE
PTYPE SEQ
String of 2 hexadecimal digits null 0 to 65535
null THROTTLE Trottle = 0 .. 32767 Period = 1 .. 32767
null T1 0 to 3600
null
2-340 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-385 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter T3 Possible values 0 to 3600 Description Address resolution request response waiting period A integer value from 0 to 3600 seconds Default: 40 seconds Loop detection buffer flush A integer value from 0 to 1440 minutes Default: 5 minutes TARP data cache flush A integer value from 0 to 1440 minutes Default: 1440 minutes Loop detection buffer entry life A integer value from 1 to 10 minutes Default: 5 minutes
null LDBFLUSH 0 to 1440
null TDCFLUSH 0 to 1440
null LDBELIFE 1 to 10 null Example input
Reset the TMODE and T1 parameter to the default on network element NEWYORK:
ED-TARP-CONFIG:NEWYORK::CTAG123::RESET:TMODE=,T1=;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-TARP-TBL
The Edit TARP Tables command is used to edit the disabled adjacency table (DAT), disabled circuit/port table (DCT), loop detection buffer (LDB), manual adjacency table (MAT), and TARP data cache (TDC). Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-TARP-TBL:[TID]::CTAG::TABLE,OPERATION:[LDBENTRY=Domain] [,TDCENTRY=Domain][,MATENTRY=Domain][,DATENTRY=Domain] [,DCTENTRY=Domain]; Table 2-386 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG TABLE Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag TARP Table CDAT - Disabled adjacency table DCT - Disabled circuit/port table LDB - Loop detection buffer MAT - Manual adjacency table TDC - TARP data cache OPERATION TARP Operation ADD - Adds a new entry operation DEL - Deletes an entry operation FLUSH - Flushes the table LDBENTRY TDCENTRY MATENTRY DATENTRY DCTENTRY Loop detection buffer entry TARP Data cache entry Manual adjacency table entry Disabled adjacency table entry Disabled circuit/port table entry
2-342 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-387 Parameter descriptions Parameter LDBENTRY 12 digit hexadecimal string 0-65535 TDCENTRY hexadecimal number up to 40 digits MATENTRY hexadecimal number up to 40 digits 12 digit hexadecimal string DATENTRY hexadecimal number up to 40 digits 12 digit hexadecimal string DCTENTRY LAN0, DCC-3, DCC-4, DCC-5, DCC-6, DCC-7, DCC-8, DCC-9, DCC-10, DCC-11, DCC-12 Possible values Description Loop detection buffer entry System ID and SEQ System ID SEQ (sequence number) TARP data cache entry TID and NSAP string of up to 20 characters TID NSAP a number including a maximum of 40 hexadecimal digits Manual adjacency table entry NSAP or System ID NSAP is a number including a maximum of 40 hexadecimal digits System ID is a 12 hexadecimal digit number Disabled adjacency table entry NSAP or System ID NSAP is a number including a maximum of 40 hexadecimal digits SystemID is a 12 hexadecimal digit number Disabled circuit/port table entry
Note: Add or delete the parameter(s) from the specified TABLE. Either parameter is mandatory if the OPERATION is either ADD or DEL. If OPERATION is FLUSH, the parameter(s) is ignored and all entries on the specified TABLE are deleted. Example input
Delete all entries from LDB table:

ED-TARP-TBL:OTTAWA::CTAG12::LDB,FLUSH;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-TOD-MODE
The Edit Time of Day Mode command is used to activate or deactivate the time of day (TOD) feature. This command is also used to configure the polling time and set the threshold values for the TOD feature. Threshold values are checked against the NP time in the event of the SP and against the external NTP server with respect to the NP. The polling times will vary between the minimum and maximum polling intervals. Security level Level 3 Input syntax (for NP)
ED-TOD-MODE:[TID]::CTAG:::SYNC=domain[,MINPOLL=Domain] [,MAXPOLL=Domain][,THRESHOLD=Domain];
Input syntax (for SP)

ED-TOD-MODE:[TID]::CTAG:::SYNC=domain [,THRESHOLD=Domain]; Table 2-388 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG SYNC MINPOLL MAXPOLL THRESHOLD Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag TOD synchronization switch (on, off) Minimum polling interval Maximum polling interval Threshold offset value
Table 2-389 Parameter descriptions Parameter SYNC Possible values Active Inactive (default) Description Turns TOD synchronization on Turns TOD synchronization off
2-344 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-389 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter MINPOLL MAXPOLL Possible values 2N where N is 1, 2, 3 ...16 Default is 2 2N where N is 1, 2, 3 ...16 Default is 9 Description Minimum polling interval in seconds based on 2N. Maximum polling interval in seconds based on 2N.
THRESHOLD 1 to 1800 in increments of 1 for Time of day offset threshold in NP seconds Default is 600 2 to 8 in increments of 1 for SP Default is 5 Example input
Set TOD parameters on a NP.

ED-TOD-MODE:NPFGX505::78:::SYNC=ACTIVE,MINPOLL=15,MAXPOLL=16, THRESHOLD=8;
Set TOD parameters on a SP.

ED-TOD-MODE:SPFGX505::79:::SYNC=ACTIVE,THRESHOLD=4;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-ULSDCC (network element)

The Edit ULSDCC command is used to change manual area addresses of the section data communications channel (SDCC) link. When the SDCC link is provisioned, MANAREA0 has a default setting of 49000. You must have at least one manual area address provisioned. If you want to delete the address in MANAREA0 and it is the only address provisioned, you must first provision an address in MANAREA1 or MANAREA2, then delete the address in MANAREA0. To change a manual area address, you must delete the address that is provisioned, then add the new address. For example, to change MANAREA1, enter the command to edit MANAREA1 and leave a blank for the domain. This clears the address in MANAREA1. Then enter the command to edit MANAREA1 again, and enter the new address for the domain. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-ULSDCC:[TID]::CTAG:::[MANAREA0=Domain][,MANAREA1=Domain] [,MANAREA2=Domain];

Table 2-390 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG MANAREA0 MANAREA1 MANAREA2 Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Layer 3 area address 0 Layer 3 area address 1 Layer 3 area address 2
2-346 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-391 Parameter descriptions Parameter MANAREA0 MANAREA1 MANAREA2 Possible values 3 to 13 octets, each octet of the form PQ, where P and Q are ASCII-encoded hex values Description Area address 0 (default) Area address 1 Area address 2
Note 1: The MANAREA address must follow a standard format for data communications protocol. Note 2: Use null to delete the existing area address. Example input
Edit the address in MANAREA1, by clearing the address that is already provisioned, then entering a new address:
ED-ULSDCC:SEATTLE::CTAG34:::MANAREA1=; ED-ULSDCC:SEATTLE::CTAG34::: MANAREA1=39830f80000000000000000000;
Delete area address 2

ED-ULSDCC:SEATTLE::CTAG34:::MANAREA2=;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-ULSDCC (network processor)

The Edit Upper Layer SDCC command is used to edit the network layer address of the OSI stack on the NP. Three manual area addresses can be provisioned. The manual area address identifies the network to which the NP belongs. When the NP is provisioned, MANAREA0 has a default setting of 490000. You must have at least one manual area address provisioned. If you want to delete the address in MANAREA0 and it is the only address provisioned, you must first provision an address in MANAREA1 or MANAREA2, then delete the address in MANAREA0. To change a manual area address, you must ensure that at least two area addresses are provisioned. You must delete the address you want to change, then add the new address. For example, to change MANAREA1, enter the command to edit MANAREA1 and leave a blank for the domain. This clears the address in MANAREA1. Then enter the command to edit MANAREA1 again, and enter the new address for the domain. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-ULSDCC:[TID]::CTAG:::[MANAREA0=Domain][,MANAREA1=Domain] [,MANAREA2=Domain];
2-348 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-392 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG MANAREA0 MANAREA1 MANAREA2 Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Layer 3 area address 0 Layer 3 area address 1 Layer 3 area address 2
Table 2-393 Parameter descriptions Parameter MANAREA0 MANAREA1 MANAREA2 Example input Possible values Description
3 to 13 octets, each octet of Network layer area address 0 the form PQ, where P and (default) Q are ASCII-encoded hex Network layer area address 1 values Network layer area address 2
Edit the address in MANAREA1, by clearing the address that is already provisioned, then entering a new address:
ED-ULSDCC:OC3NP::CTAG34:::MANAREA1=; ED-ULSDCC:OC3NP::CTAG34::: MANAREA1=39840f80000000000000000000;
Delete area address 0:

ED-ULSDCC:OC3NP::CTAG34:::MANAREA0=;
Optical Metro 3500
ED-ULX25
The Edit Upper Level X.25 command is used to edit the common parameters for all switched virtual circuits (SVCs) on the X.25 network level. Note 1: To edit the parameters for a permanent virtual circuit (PVC), use the ED-VC command (page 2-352). Note 2: Changes to any of the following ULX25 parameters cause all current SVC calls to be lost and all PVC calls to be restarted: TXSIZE, RXSIZE, WNDW, MODULUS, T20, N20, T21, T22, T23, N22, N23, or DBIT. Note 3: Changes to any of the following ULX25 parameters only affect new calls: NUI, NEGFLOWCTRL, NEGTXSIZE, NEGRXSIZE, NEGTXWNDW, NEGRXWNDW, NEGTRPTCLS, NEGTXTRPT, or NEGRXTRPT. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-ULX25:[TID]::CTAG:::[TXSIZE=Domain][,RXSIZE=Domain] [,WNDW=Domain][,MODULUS=Domain][,T20=Domain][,N20=Domain] [,T21=Domain][,T22=Domain][,T23=Domain][,N22=Domain] [,N23=Domain][,DBIT=Domain][,NUI=Domain][,NEGFLOWCTRL=Domain] [,NEGTXSIZE=Domain][,NEGRXSIZE=Domain][,NEGTXWNDW=Domain] [,NEGRXWNDW=Domain][,NEGTRPTCLS=Domain][,NEGTXTRPT=Domain] [,NEGRXTRPT=Domain]; Table 2-394 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG TXSIZE RXSIZE WNDW MODULUS T20 N20 T21 T22 Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Maximum Transmitting Packet Size Maximum Receiving Packet Size Packet Window Size Sequence Number Range DTE Restart Time-out Number of T20 Retries DTE Call Request Time-out DTE Reset Time-out
2-350 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-394 (continued) Syntax definition Field T23 N22 N23 DBIT NUI Purpose Declare Time-out Number of T22 Retries Number of T23 Retries Delivery Confirmation Option Network User ID
NEGFLOWCTRL Negotiate Flow Control NEGTXSIZE NEGRXSIZE NEGTXWNDW NEGRXWNDW NEGTRPTCLS NEGTXTRPT NEGRXTRPT NFC Transmit Packet Size NFC Receive Packet Size NCF Transmit Packet Window Size NCF Receive Packet Window Size Negotiate Throughput Class Throughput Class of Transmitter Throughput Class of Receiver
Table 2-395 Parameter descriptions Parameter TXSIZE RXSIZE WNDW MODULUS T20 Possible values 16 to 4096 16 to 4096 1 to 7 or 1 to 127 8 or 128 5 to 500 sec Description (default 128) Maximum transmitting packet size (default 128) Maximum receiving packet size (default 2) Packet window size based on ULX25 MODULUS value (default 8) Sequence number range (default 180 sec) Data terminating equipment (DTE) restart time-out (5 sec increment) (default 1) Number of T20 retries (default 200 sec) DTE call request time-out (5 sec increment) (default 180 sec) DTE reset time-out (5 sec increment)
N20 T21 T22
1 to 255 5 to 500 sec 5 to 500 sec
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-351 Table 2-395 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter T23 N22 N23 DBIT NUI NEGFLOWCTL NEGTXSIZE NEGRXSIZE NEGTXWNDW NEGRXWNDW NEGTRPTCLS NEGTXTRPT NEGRXTRPT Possible values 5 to 500 sec 1 to 255 1 to 255 Y N Maximum 20 ASCII characters ON OFF 16 to 4096 16 to 4096 1 to 7 or 1 to 127 1 to 7 or 1 to 127 ON OFF 7 to 11 7 to 11 Description (default 180 sec) Declare time-out (5 sec increment) (default 1) Number of T22 retries (default 1) Number of T23 retries (default YES) Delivery confirmation option (default null string) Network user identification for SVC only. (see Note 4) (default OFF) Negotiate flow control (NFC) (default 128) NFC: Tx packet size (see Note 1) (default 128) NFC: Rx packet size (see Note 1) (default 2) NFC: Tx window size based on ULX25 MODULUS value (see Note 1) (default 2) NFC: Rx window size based on LIX25 MODULUS value (see Note 1) (default OFF) Negotiate throughput class (default 10) Throughput class: speed of transmitter (see Note 2) (default 10) Throughput class: speed of receiver (see Note 2)
Note 1: The default value applies only when NEGFLOWCTRL is ON. Note 2: The default value applies only when NEGTRPTCLS is ON. Note 3: Any edited parameter values are also applied only when NEGFLOWCTRL or NEGTRPTCLS is on. Note 4: Some ASCII characters are not supported for NUI. The semi-colon (;), question mark (?), backslash (\), space ( ), double quotes ( ), and comma (,) are not supported. Example input
Modify the TXSIZE and the RXSIZE parameters:

ED-ULX25:OC3NP::CTAG45:::TXSIZE=256,RXSIZE=256;
ED-VC
The Edit Virtual Circuit (VC) command modifies the parameter values of the specified permanent virtual circuit (PVC). This command cannot be used to modify a switched virtual circuit (SVC). To modify SVCs, use the ED-ULX25 command (page 2-349). You can use ED-VC to change an SVC to a PVC, or to change a PVC to an SVC. To change an SVC to a PVC, you must specify the values of LCGN and LCN. Default values of TXSIZE and RXSIZE are available from ULX25 (see Table 2-397). To change a PVC to an SVC, the PVC is deleted and the circuit is restored as an SVC with default parameter values from the ULX25 (see Table 2-397). Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-VC:[TID]:AID:CTAG::TYPE:[DBIT=Domain][,WNDW=Domain] [,T21=Domain][,T22=Domain][,T23=Domain][,N22=Domain] [,N23=Domain][,LCN=Domain][,LCGN=Domain][,TXSIZE=Domain] [,RXSIZE=Domain]; Table 2-396 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG TYPE DBIT WNDW T21 T22 T23 N22 N23 LCN Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The VC number to act on. Possible values are 0 to 15. Null is not a valid value. Correlation tag The virtual circuit (VC) type, SVC or PVC Delivery Confirmation Option Packet Window Size DTE Call Request Time-out DTE Reset Time-out Declare Time-out Number of T22 Retries Number of T23 Retries Logical Channel Number (required for PVC)
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-353 Table 2-396 (continued) Syntax definition Field LCGN TXSIZE RXSIZE Purpose Logical Channel Group Number (required for PVC) Maximum Transmitting Packet Size Maximum Receiving Packet Size
Table 2-397 Parameter descriptions Parameter DBIT WNDW T21 T22 T23 N22 N23 LCN LCGN TXSIZE RXSIZE Possible values Description Y N 1 to 7 or 1 to 127 5 to 500 sec 5 to 500 sec 5 to 500 sec 1 to 255 1 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 7 16 to 4096 16 to 4096 (default YES) Delivery confirmation option (default 2) Packet window size based on ULX25 MODULUS value (default 200 sec) DTE call request time-out (default 180 sec) DTE reset time-out (default 180 sec) Declare time-out (default 1) Number of T22 retries (default 1) Number of T23 retries Logical channel number (see Note) Logical channel group number (see Note) (default 128) Maximum transmitting packet size (default 128) Maximum receiving packet size
Note: Values for LCGN and LCN must be provided when switching an SVC to a PVC. Example input
Change SVC #10 to PVC:

ED-VC:OC3NP:10:CTAG45::PVC:LCGN=0,LCN=5,WNDW=5;
This command reconfigures VC #10 to be a PVC with LCGN and LCN set to 0 and 5 respectively, and WNDW set to 5. Change PVC #10 back to SVC:
ED-VC:OC3NP:10:CTAG45::SVC:;
This command deletes PVC #10 and restores VC #10 as an SVC with WNDW reset to default value 2.
ED-WAN
Use the Edit WAN command to edit the parameters of a WAN port of a 2x100BT-P2P or 8x100BT-P2P circuit pack. You can also use this command to edit the WAN on the GE/FC SFP of a 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P or a 4x100FX P2P circuit pack. Note: To edit the parameters of a WAN port, the corresponding ETH or FC port must be in an out-of-service (OOS) state. See RMV-ETH on page 3-393 to put a ETH port to an OOS state. See RMV-FC on page 3-394 to put an FC port to an OOS state. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ED-WAN:[tid]:aid:ctag:::[MAGICNUM=Domain][,FCS=Domain][,LCM=Do main][,MAPPING=Domain][,VCAT=Domain][,LCAS=Domain][,LANFCS=Dom ain][,GFPRTDELAY=Domain][,GFPRFI=Domain]; Table 2-398 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MAGICNUM FCS LCM VCAT GFPRFI Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The WAN port to edit. Correlation tag Magic number (for 2x100BT-P2P only) Frame check sum. Does not apply for the WAN port that is associated with a fibre channel port. Link connectivity monitor (for 2x100BT-P2P only) Virtual concatenation (not applicable for 2x100BT-P2P) Generic Framing Procedure Remote Failure Indication. Enable or disable control of the GFP RFI client management frame (CMF) transmission on the WAN facility (not applicable for 2x100BT-P2P) Enable or disable the ping used by a CMF to calculate RTDELAY (not applicable for 2x100BT-P2P) Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme, (only for the 8x100BT-P2P and 4x100FX-P2P circuit packs). This parameter defaults to DISABLE, and can only be ENABLED when the VCAT parameter is ENABLED.
GFPRTDELAY LCAS
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-355 Table 2-399 AID descriptions AID type WAN AID Command-specific values Purpose WAN-slot#-port# WAN-slot#-ALL Identify the WAN port where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 2 for all the other supported cards Identify the WAN port where slot = 3 to 6 port = 1 to 8 HLINE = OC3 or OC12 Hslot# = 3 to 10 Hport# = 1 to 4 depending on the circuit pack
MS DSM WAN AID
WAN-slot-port-%HLINKHline-Hslot-Hport
Table 2-400 Parameter descriptions Parameter MAGICNUM Possible values ENABLE DISABLE (default) Description Enable or disable the use of a magic number. The magic number is used during PPP negotiation on the 2x100BT-P2P WAN facility only. When enabled, the magic number field is four octets and helps in detecting looped back links. A random string is sent across the link and if the same value is returned, then the circuit pack determines that the link is looped back and the negotiation fails. If this occurs, a "Link Down" alarm is raised against the WAN port. When disabled, the magic number is always transmitted as zero and is always ignored on reception. FCS 0 16 32 Set the frame check size (in bits) of the WAN port. Possible values for the 2x100BT-P2P WAN facility are 16 or 32. Possible values for the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P WAN facility are 0 or 32. Note that the port at the other end of the connection must have the same frame check size as this port. This parameter is only available for the GE/FC SFP WAN facility if the WAN facility was created in association with the ETH port.
2-356 Commands A to ED-zz Table 2-400 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter LCM Possible values ENABLE DISABLE (default) Description Whether link connectivity monitoring is enabled or disabled at the WAN port. This attribute is only supported on the 2x100BT-P2P WAN facility. Note that if you enable link connectivity monitoring, the Link Down alarm is raised against the WAN port during a software load or FPGA upgrade or when the port at the other end of the connection does not support link connectivity monitoring. The recommended configuration is to have link connectivity monitoring disabled at both ends of the connection. Note that when link connectivity monitoring is enabled, an echo request is sent every second. If more than five echo requests are transmitted without receiving an echo response, the PPP operational OSI state becomes disabled and PPP attempts to re-establish the link connection through LCP configuration request packets. VCAT ENABLE DISABLE (default) Enable or disable virtual concatenation for the GE/FC SFP WAN facility. This attribute is disabled by default. Note that you can only edit this attribute if there are no cross-connections present on the specified facility. Enable or disable to control the GFP RFI CMF transmission. You can only edit this parameter if the WAN facility is OOS-MA. If enabled, GFPRFI causes GFP RFI CMF transmission if the WAN link goes down.
GFPRFI
ENABLE (default for ETH) DISABLE (default and only value for FC)
Optical Metro 3500
Commands A to ED-zz 2-357 Table 2-400 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter GFPRTDELAY Possible values ENABLE (default) DISABLE Description Enable or disable the ping used by a CMF to calculate RTDELAY and the Distance Exceeded Alarm. If this parameter is set to DISABLE, the RTDELAY will always be UNKNOWN and the Distance Exceeded Alarm will not be raised. This parameter can only be edited when the WAN facility is OOS-MA. LCAS is a signalling protocol for VCAT that allows hitless VCGM addition to or deletion from a group. It also allows automated degradation of the total bandwidth capacity of a VCG when one or more of its VCGMs is faulty. Can only be edited if virtual concatenation is enabled.
LCAS
ENABLE (default) DISABLE
Example input
Enable the use of a magic number, set the FCS to 16 bits, and disable link connectivity monitoring on WAN port 2 of the 2x100BT-P2P circuit pack in slot 9 of network element OTTAWA:
ED-WAN:OTTAWA:WAN-9-2:CTAG01:::MAGICNUM=ENABLE,FCS=16, LCM=DISABLE;
Optical Metro 3500
Nortel
Optical Metro 3500

TL1 ReferencePart 1 of 4
Copyright 2000-2008 Nortel Networks, All Rights Reserved This document is protected by copyright laws and international treaties. All information, copyrights and any other intellectual property rights contained in this document are the property of Nortel Networks. Except as expressly authorized in writing by Nortel Networks, the holder is granted no rights to use the information contained herein and this document shall not be published, copied, produced or reproduced, modified, translated, compiled, distributed, displayed or transmitted, in whole or part, in any form or media.
This information is provided as is, and Nortel Networks does not make or provide any warranty of any kind, expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of merchantability, non-infringement of third party intellectual property rights, and fitness for a particular purpose. Nortel, the Nortel logo, and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
323-1059-190 Standard Release 16.0 Issue 1 December 2008 Printed in Canada

TL1 Reference Guide - 323-1059-190.1.r16

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TL1 Reference Guide - 323-1059-190.1.r16

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NTN465GNNTN465GN

Optical Metro 3500

Standard Release 16.0 Issue 1 December 2008

Copyright 2000-2008 Nortel Networks, All Rights Reserved

TL1 ReferencePart 1 of 4 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008

Contents vii ED-VC 2-352 ED-WAN 2-354

TL1 ReferencePart 1 of 4 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008

Optical Metro 3500

323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008

About this document

TL1 ReferencePart 1 of 4 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008

x About this document

Hardware naming conventions

Optical Metro 3500

323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008

About this document xi

Optical Metro 3500 NTP library

Guides and Shelf Setup

Operations, Administration and Provisioning

TL1 Reference (323-1059-190)

TL1 ReferencePart 1 of 4 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008

xii About this document

Technical support and information

Optical Metro 3500

323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008

TL1 ReferencePart 1 of 4 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008

1-2 Introducing TL1

TL1 user interface on the network element

TL1 user interface on the network processor

Optical Metro 3500

323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008

Introducing TL1 1-3

TL1 command interface

1-4 Introducing TL1

Introducing TL1 1-5

1-6 Introducing TL1

TL1 message notation

Optical Metro 3500

323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008

Introducing TL1 1-7

TL1 message overview

TL1 ReferencePart 1 of 4 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008

1-8 Introducing TL1

Optical Metro 3500

323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008

Refer to Chapter 6, Error codes and messages.

TL1 ReferencePart 1 of 4 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008

1-10 Introducing TL1

TL1 script file

Introducing TL1 1-11

Online syntax help

For example, entering

returns the following list:

TL1 ReferencePart 1 of 4 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008

returns the following:

To get the whole command syntax structure enter

and the following results:

Optical Metro 3500

323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008

Introducing TL1 1-13

Entering a question mark in a specific field such as the TID

results in a field-specific response as follows:

and the response is always context specific: